1 The Common European Framework In Its Political And Educational ...

1
The Common European Framework in its political
and educational context
1.1
What is the Common European Framework?
The Common European Framework provides a common basis for the elaboration of lan-
guage syllabuses, curriculum guidelines, examinations, textbooks, etc. across Europe. It
describes in a comprehensive way what language learners have to learn to do in order to
use a language for communication and what knowledge and skills they have to develop
so as to be able to act effectively. The description also covers the cultural context in which
language is set. The Framework also deﬁnes levels of proﬁciency which allow learners’
progress to be measured at each stage of learning and on a life-long basis.
The Common European Framework is intended to overcome the barriers to communi-
cation among professionals working in the ﬁeld of modern languages arising from the
different educational systems in Europe. It provides the means for educational adminis-
trators, course designers, teachers, teacher trainers, examining bodies, etc., to reﬂect on
their current practice, with a view to situating and co-ordinating their efforts and to
ensuring that they meet the real needs of the learners for whom they are responsible.
By providing a common basis for the explicit description of objectives, content and
methods, the Framework will enhance the transparency of courses, syllabuses and qual-
iﬁcations, thus promoting international co-operation in the ﬁeld of modern languages.
The provision of objective criteria for describing language proﬁciency will facilitate the
mutual recognition of qualiﬁcations gained in different learning contexts, and accord-
ingly will aid European mobility.
The taxonomic nature of the Framework inevitably means trying to handle the great
complexity of human language by breaking language competence down into separate
components. This confronts us with psychological and pedagogical problems of some
depth. Communication calls upon the whole human being. The competences separated
and classiﬁed below interact in complex ways in the development of each unique human
personality. As a social agent, each individual forms relationships with a widening
cluster of overlapping social groups, which together deﬁne identity. In an intercultural
approach, it is a central objective of language education to promote the favourable devel-
opment of the learner’s whole personality and sense of identity in response to the enrich-
ing experience of otherness in language and culture. It must be left to teachers and the
learners themselves to reintegrate the many parts into a healthily developing whole.
The Framework includes the description of ‘partial’ qualiﬁcations, appropriate when
only a more restricted knowledge of a language is required (e.g. for understanding
rather than speaking), or when a limited amount of time is available for the learning of
a third or fourth language and more useful results can perhaps be attained by aiming
1

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
at, say, recognition rather than recall skills. Giving formal recognition to such abilities
will help to promote plurilingualism through the learning of a wider variety of
European languages.
1.2
The aims and objectives of Council of Europe language policy
CEF serves the overall aim of the Council of Europe as deﬁned in Recommendations R (82)
18 and R (98) 6 of the Committee of Ministers: ‘to achieve greater unity among its
members’ and to pursue this aim ‘by the adoption of common action in the cultural ﬁeld’.
The work of the Council for Cultural Co-operation of the Council of Europe with regard
to modern languages, organised since its foundation in a series of medium-term projects,
has derived its coherence and continuity from adherence to three basic principles set
down in the preamble to Recommendation R (82) 18 of the Committee of Ministers of the
Council of Europe:
•
that the rich heritage of diverse languages and cultures in Europe is a valu-
able common resource to be protected and developed, and that a major edu-
cational effort is needed to convert that diversity from a barrier to
communication into a source of mutual enrichment and understanding;
•
that it is only through a better knowledge of European modern languages
that it will be possible to facilitate communication and interaction among
Europeans of different mother tongues in order to promote European mobil-
ity, mutual understanding and co-operation, and overcome prejudice and dis-
crimination;
•
that member states, when adopting or developing national policies in the
ﬁeld of modern language learning and teaching, may achieve greater conver-
gence at the European level by means of appropriate arrangements for
ongoing co-operation and co-ordination of policies.
In the pursuit of these principles, the Committee of Ministers called upon member
governments
(F14) To promote the national and international collaboration of governmental
and non-governmental institutions engaged in the development of methods of
teaching and evaluation in the ﬁeld of modern language learning and in the pro-
duction and use of materials, including institutions engaged in the production
and use of multi-media materials.
(F17) To take such steps as are necessary to complete the establishment of an effec-
tive European system of information exchange covering all aspects of language
learning, teaching and research, and making full use of information technology.
Consequently, the activities of the CDCC (Council for Cultural Co-operation), its
Committee for Education and its Modern Languages Section, have been concerned to
encourage, support and co-ordinate the efforts of member governments and non-
governmental institutions to improve language learning in accordance with these funda-
2

The Common European Framework in its political and educational context
mental principles and in particular the steps which they take to implement the general
measures set out in the Appendix to R(82)18:
A. General measures
1.
To ensure, as far as possible, that all sections of their populations have access
to effective means of acquiring a knowledge of the languages of other
member states (or of other communities within their own country) as well as
the skills in the use of those languages that will enable them to satisfy their
communicative needs and in particular:
.
1.1
to deal with the business of everyday life in another country, and to help
foreigners staying in their own country to do so;
.
1.2
to exchange information and ideas with young people and adults who
speak a different language and to communicate their thoughts and feel-
ings to them;
.
1.3
to achieve a wider and deeper understanding of the way of life and
forms of thought of other peoples and of their cultural heritage.
2.
To promote, encourage and support the efforts of teachers and learners at all
levels to apply in their own situation the principles of the construction of
language-learning systems (as these are progressively developed within the
Council of Europe ‘Modern languages’ programme):
.
2.1
by basing language teaching and learning on the needs, motivations,
characteristics and resources of learners;
.
2.2
by deﬁning worthwhile and realistic objectives as explicitly as possible;
.
2.3
by developing appropriate methods and materials;
.
2.4
by developing suitable forms and instruments for the evaluating of
learning programmes.
3.
To promote research and development programmes leading to the introduc-
tion, at all educational levels, of methods and materials best suited to ena-
bling different classes and types of student to acquire a communicative
proﬁciency appropriate to their speciﬁc needs.
The preamble to R(98)6 reafﬁrms the political objectives of its actions in the ﬁeld of
modern languages:
•
To equip all Europeans for the challenges of intensiﬁed international mobil-
ity and closer co-operation not only in education, culture and science but also
in trade and industry.
•
To promote mutual understanding and tolerance, respect for identities and
cultural diversity through more effective international communication.
•
To maintain and further develop the richness and diversity of European cul-
tural life through greater mutual knowledge of national and regional lan-
guages, including those less widely taught.
•
To meet the needs of a multilingual and multicultural Europe by appreciably
developing the ability of Europeans to communicate with each other across
linguistic and cultural boundaries, which requires a sustained, lifelong effort
to be encouraged, put on an organised footing and ﬁnanced at all levels of
education by the competent bodies.
3

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
To avert the dangers that might result from the marginalisation of those
lacking the skills necessary to communicate in an interactive Europe.
Particular urgency was attached to these objectives by the First Summit of Heads of State,
which identiﬁed xenophobia and ultra-nationalist backlashes as a primary obstacle to
European mobility and integration, and as a major threat to European stability and to
the healthy functioning of democracy. The second summit made preparation for demo-
cratic citizenship a priority educational objective, thus giving added importance to a
further objective pursued in recent projects, namely:
To promote methods of modern language teaching which will strengthen inde-
pendence of thought, judgement and action, combined with social skills and
responsibility.
In the light of these objectives, the Committee of Ministers stressed ‘the political impor-
tance at the present time and in the future of developing speciﬁc ﬁelds of action, such
as strategies for diversifying and intensifying language learning in order to promote plu-
rilingualism in a pan-European context’ and drew attention to the value of further devel-
oping educational links and exchanges and of exploiting the full potential of new
communication and information technologies.
1.3
What is ‘plurilingualism’?
In recent years, the concept of plurilingualism has grown in importance in the Council
of Europe’s approach to language learning. Plurilingualism differs from multilingual-
ism, which is the knowledge of a number of languages, or the co-existence of different
languages in a given society. Multilingualism may be attained by simply diversifying the
languages on offer in a particular school or educational system, or by encouraging pupils
to learn more than one foreign language, or reducing the dominant position of English
in international communication. Beyond this, the plurilingual approach emphasises the
fact that as an individual person’s experience of language in its cultural contexts
expands, from the language of the home to that of society at large and then to the lan-
guages of other peoples (whether learnt at school or college, or by direct experience), he
or she does not keep these languages and cultures in strictly separated mental compart-
ments, but rather builds up a communicative competence to which all knowledge and
experience of language contributes and in which languages interrelate and interact. In
different situations, a person can call ﬂexibly upon different parts of this competence to
achieve effective communication with a particular interlocutor. For instance, partners
may switch from one language or dialect to another, exploiting the ability of each to
express themselves in one language and to understand the other; or a person may call
upon the knowledge of a number of languages to make sense of a text, written or even
spoken, in a previously ‘unknown’ language, recognising words from a common interna-
tional store in a new guise. Those with some knowledge, even slight, may use it to help
those with none to communicate by mediating between individuals with no common
language. In the absence of a mediator, such individuals may nevertheless achieve some
degree of communication by bringing the whole of their linguistic equipment into play,
4

The Common European Framework in its political and educational context
experimenting with alternative forms of expression in different languages or dialects,
exploiting paralinguistics (mime, gesture, facial expression, etc.) and radically simplify-
ing their use of language.
From this perspective, the aim of language education is profoundly modiﬁed. It is no
longer seen as simply to achieve ‘mastery’ of one or two, or even three languages, each
taken in isolation, with the ‘ideal native speaker’ as the ultimate model. Instead, the aim
is to develop a linguistic repertory, in which all linguistic abilities have a place. This
implies, of course, that the languages offered in educational institutions should be diver-
siﬁed and students given the opportunity to develop a plurilingual competence.
Furthermore, once it is recognised that language learning is a lifelong task, the develop-
ment of a young person’s motivation, skill and conﬁdence in facing new language expe-
rience out of school comes to be of central importance. The responsibilities of
educational authorities, qualifying examining bodies and teachers cannot simply be
conﬁned to the attainment of a given level of proﬁciency in a particular language at a
particular moment in time, important though that undoubtedly is.
The full implications of such a paradigm shift have yet to be worked out and translated
into action. The recent developments in the Council of Europe’s language programme
have been designed to produce tools for use by all members of the language teaching pro-
fession in the promotion of plurilingualism. In particular, The European Language
Portfolio (ELP) provides a format in which language learning and intercultural experi-
ences of the most diverse kinds can be recorded and formally recognised. For this purpose,
CEF not only provides a scaling of overall language proﬁciency in a given language, but
also a breakdown of language use and language competences which will make it easier
for practitioners to specify objectives and describe achievements of the most diverse kinds
in accordance with the varying needs, characteristics and resources of learners.
1.4
Why is CEF needed?
In the words of the Intergovernmental Symposium held in Rüschlikon, Switzerland
November 1991, on the initiative of the Swiss Federal Government, on: ‘Transparency and
Coherence in Language Learning in Europe: Objectives, Evaluation, Certiﬁcation’:
1.
A further intensiﬁcation of language learning and teaching in member coun-
tries is necessary in the interests of greater mobility, more effective interna-
tional communication combined with respect for identity and cultural
diversity, better access to information, more intensive personal interaction,
improved working relations and a deeper mutual understanding.
2.
To achieve these aims language learning is necessarily a life-long task to be
promoted and facilitated throughout educational systems, from pre-school
through to adult education.
3.
It is desirable to develop a Common European Framework of reference for
language learning at all levels, in order to:
.
•
promote and facilitate co-operation among educational institutions in
different countries;
.
•
provide a sound basis for the mutual recognition of language qualiﬁca-
tions;
5

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
.
•
assist learners, teachers, course designers, examining bodies and educa-
tional administrators to situate and co-ordinate their efforts.
Plurilingualism has itself to be seen in the context of pluriculturalism. Language is not
only a major aspect of culture, but also a means of access to cultural manifestations.
Much of what is said above applies equally in the more general ﬁeld: in a person’s cultu-
ral competence, the various cultures (national, regional, social) to which that person has
gained access do not simply co-exist side by side; they are compared, contrasted and
actively interact to produce an enriched, integrated pluricultural competence, of which
plurilingual competence is one component, again interacting with other components.
1.5
For what uses is CEF intended?
The uses of the Framework include:
The planning of language learning programmes in terms of:
•
their assumptions regarding prior knowledge, and their articulation with earlier
learning, particularly at interfaces between primary, lower secondary, upper secon-
dary and higher/further education;
•
their objectives;
•
their content.
The planning of language certiﬁcation in terms of:
•
the content syllabus of examinations;
•
assessment criteria, in terms of positive achievement rather than negative deﬁcien-
cies.
The planning of self-directed learning, including:
•
raising the learner’s awareness of his or her present state of knowledge;
•
self-setting of feasible and worthwhile objectives;
•
selection of materials;
•
self-assessment.
Learning programmes and certiﬁcation can be:
•
global, bringing a learner forward in all dimensions of language proﬁciency and com-
municative competence;
•
modular, improving the learner’s proﬁciency in a restricted area for a particular
purpose;
•
weighted, emphasising learning in certain directions and producing a ‘proﬁle’ in
which a higher level is attained in some areas of knowledge and skill than others;
•
partial, taking responsibility only for certain activities and skills (e.g. reception) and
leaving others aside.
6

The Common European Framework in its political and educational context
The Common European Framework is constructed so as to accommodate these various
forms.
In considering the role of a common framework at more advanced stages of language
learning it is necessary to take into account changes in the nature of needs of learners
and the context in which they live, study and work. There is a need for general qualiﬁca-
tions at a level beyond threshold, which may be situated with reference to the CEF. They
have, of course, to be well deﬁned, properly adapted to national situations and embrace
new areas, particularly in the cultural ﬁeld and more specialised domains. In addition,
a considerable role may be played by modules or clusters of modules geared to the
speciﬁc needs, characteristics and resources of learners.
1.6
What criteria must CEF meet?
In order to fulﬁl its functions, such a Common European Framework must be compre-
hensive, transparent and coherent.
By ‘comprehensive’ is meant that the Common European Framework should attempt to
specify as full a range of language knowledge, skills and use as possible (without of course
attempting to forecast a priori all possible uses of language in all situations – an impossible
task), and that all users should be able to describe their objectives, etc., by reference to it.
CEF should differentiate the various dimensions in which language proﬁciency is
described, and provide a series of reference points (levels or steps) by which progress in
learning can be calibrated. It should be borne in mind that the development of communi-
cative proﬁciency involves other dimensions than the strictly linguistic (e.g. sociocultural
awareness, imaginative experience, affective relations, learning to learn, etc.).
By ‘transparent’ is meant that information must be clearly formulated and explicit,
available and readily comprehensible to users.
By ‘coherent’ is meant that the description is free from internal contradictions. With
regard to educational systems, coherence requires that there is a harmonious relation
among their components:
•
the identiﬁcation of needs;
•
the determination of objectives;
•
the deﬁnition of content;
•
the selection or creation of material;
•
the establishment of teaching/learning programmes;
•
the teaching and learning methods employed;
•
evaluation, testing and assessment.
The construction of a comprehensive, transparent and coherent framework for language
learning and teaching does not imply the imposition of one single uniform system. On
the contrary, the framework should be open and ﬂexible, so that it can be applied, with
such adaptations as prove necessary, to particular situations. CEF should be:
•
multi-purpose: usable for the full variety of purposes involved in the planning and pro-
vision of facilities for language learning
•
ﬂexible: adaptable for use in different circumstances
7

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
open: capable of further extension and reﬁnement
•
dynamic: in continuous evolution in response to experience in its use
•
user-friendly: presented in a form readily understandable and usable by those to whom
it is addressed
•
non-dogmatic: not irrevocably and exclusively attached to any one of a number of com-
peting linguistic or educational theories or practices.
8

2
Approach adopted
2.1
An action-oriented approach
A comprehensive, transparent and coherent frame of reference for language learning,
teaching and assessment must relate to a very general view of language use and learn-
ing. The approach adopted here, generally speaking, is an action-oriented one in so far
as it views users and learners of a language primarily as ‘social agents’, i.e. members of
society who have tasks (not exclusively language-related) to accomplish in a given set of
circumstances, in a speciﬁc environment and within a particular ﬁeld of action. While
acts of speech occur within language activities, these activities form part of a wider
social context, which alone is able to give them their full meaning. We speak of ‘tasks’
in so far as the actions are performed by one or more individuals strategically using their
own speciﬁc competences to achieve a given result. The action-based approach therefore
also takes into account the cognitive, emotional and volitional resources and the full
range of abilities speciﬁc to and applied by the individual as a social agent.
Accordingly, any form of language use and learning could be described as follows:
Language use, embracing language learning, comprises the actions performed by
persons who as individuals and as social agents develop a range of competences,
both general and in particular communicative language competences. They draw
on the competences at their disposal in various contexts under various conditions
and under various constraints to engage in language activities involving language
processes to produce and/or receive texts in relation to themes in speciﬁc domains,
activating those strategies which seem most appropriate for carrying out the tasks
to be accomplished. The monitoring of these actions by the participants leads to the
reinforcement or modiﬁcation of their competences.
•
Competences are the sum of knowledge, skills and characteristics that allow a person
to perform actions.
•
General competences are those not speciﬁc to language, but which are called upon for
actions of all kinds, including language activities.
•
Communicative language competences are those which empower a person to act using
speciﬁcally linguistic means.
•
Context refers to the constellation of events and situational factors (physical and
others), both internal and external to a person, in which acts of communication are
embedded.
9

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
Language activities involve the exercise of one’s communicative language competence
in a speciﬁc domain in processing (receptively and/or productively) one or more texts
in order to carry out a task.
•
Language processes refer to the chain of events, neurological and physiological,
involved in the production and reception of speech and writing.
•
Text is any sequence or discourse (spoken and/or written) related to a speciﬁc domain
and which in the course of carrying out a task becomes the occasion of a language
activity, whether as a support or as a goal, as product or process.
•
Domain refers to the broad sectors of social life in which social agents operate. A
higher order categorisation has been adopted here limiting these to major categories
relevant to language learning/teaching and use: the educational, occupational,
public and personal domains.
•
A strategy is any organised, purposeful and regulated line of action chosen by an indi-
vidual to carry out a task which he or she sets for himself or herself or with which he
or she is confronted.
•
A task is deﬁned as any purposeful action considered by an individual as necessary in
order to achieve a given result in the context of a problem to be solved, an obligation
to fulﬁl or an objective to be achieved. This deﬁnition would cover a wide range of
actions such as moving a wardrobe, writing a book, obtaining certain conditions in
the negotiation of a contract, playing a game of cards, ordering a meal in a restau-
rant, translating a foreign language text or preparing a class newspaper through
group work.
If it is accepted that the different dimensions highlighted above are interrelated in all
forms of language use and learning, then any act of language learning or teaching is in
some way concerned with each of these dimensions: strategies, tasks, texts, an individ-
ual’s general competences, communicative language competence, language activities,
language processes, contexts and domains.
At the same time, it is also possible in learning and teaching that the objective, and
therefore assessment, may be focused on a particular component or sub-component (the
other components then being considered as means to an end, or as aspects to be given
more emphasis at other times, or as not being relevant to the circumstances). Learners,
teachers, course designers, authors of teaching material and test designers are inevita-
bly involved in this process of focusing on a particular dimension and deciding on the
extent to which other dimensions should be considered and ways of taking account of
these: this is illustrated with examples below. It is immediately clear, however, that
although the often stated aim of a teaching/learning programme is to develop commu-
nication skills (possibly because this is most representative of a methodological
approach?), certain programmes in reality strive to achieve a qualitative or quantitative
development of language activities in a foreign language, others stress performance in a
particular domain, yet others the development of certain general competences, while
others are primarily concerned with reﬁning strategies. The claim that ‘everything is
connected’ does not mean that the objectives cannot be differentiated.
Each of the main categories outlined above can be divided into sub-categories, still very
generic, which will be looked at in the following chapters. Here, we are looking only at
the various components of general competences, communicative competence, language
activities and domains.
10

Approach adopted
2.1.1
The general competences of an individual
The general competences of language learners or users (see section 5.1.) consist in particu-
lar of their knowledge, skills and existential competence and also their ability to learn:
Knowledge, i.e. declarative knowledge (savoir, see 5.1.1.), is understood as knowledge result-
ing from experience (empirical knowledge) and from more formal learning (academic
knowledge). All human communication depends on a shared knowledge of the world. As
far as language use and learning are concerned, the knowledge which comes into play is
not directly related exclusively to language and culture. Academic knowledge in a scien-
tiﬁc or technical educational ﬁeld, and academic or empirical knowledge in a profes-
sional ﬁeld clearly have an important part to play in the reception and understanding of
texts in a foreign language relating to those ﬁelds. Empirical knowledge relating to day-
to-day living (organisation of the day, mealtimes, means of transport, communication
and information), in the public or private domains is, however, just as essential for the
management of language activities in a foreign language. Knowledge of the shared
values and beliefs held by social groups in other countries and regions, such as religious
beliefs, taboos, assumed common history, etc., are essential to intercultural communica-
tion. These multiple areas of knowledge vary from individual to individual. They may be
culture-speciﬁc, but nevertheless also relate to more universal parameters and constants.
Any new knowledge is not simply added onto the knowledge one had before but is con-
ditioned by the nature, richness and structure of one’s previous knowledge and, further-
more, serves to modify and restructure the latter, however partially. Clearly, the
knowledge which an individual has already acquired is directly relevant to language
learning. In many cases, methods of teaching and learning pre-suppose this awareness
of the world. However, in certain contexts (e.g. immersion, attending school or univer-
sity where the language of tuition is not one’s mother tongue), there is simultaneous and
correlated enrichment of linguistic and other knowledge. Careful consideration must
then be given to the relationship between knowledge and communicative competence.
Skills and know-how (savoir-faire, see section 5.1.2.), whether it be a matter of driving a
car, playing the violin or chairing a meeting, depend more on the ability to carry out pro-
cedures than on declarative knowledge, but this skill may be facilitated by the acquisi-
tion of ‘forgettable’ knowledge and be accompanied by forms of existential competence
(for example relaxed attitude or tension in carrying out a task). Thus, in the example
quoted above, driving a car, which through repetition and experience becomes a series
of almost automatic processes (declutching, changing gear, etc.), initially requires an
explicit break-down of conscious and verbalisable operations (‘Slowly release the clutch
pedal, slip into third gear, etc.’) and the acquisition of certain facts (there are three pedals
in a manual car set out as follows, etc.) which one does not have to consciously think
about once one ‘knows how to drive’. When one is learning to drive, one generally needs
a high level of concentration and heightened self-awareness since one’s own self-image
is particularly vulnerable (risk of failure, of appearing incompetent). Once the skills have
been mastered, the driver can be expected to be much more at ease and self-conﬁdent;
otherwise this would be disconcerting for passengers and other motorists. Clearly, it
would not be difﬁcult to draw parallels with certain aspects of language learning (e.g.
pronunciation and some parts of grammar, such as inﬂexional morphology).
Existential competence (savoir-être, see 5.1.3.) may be considered as the sum of the individ-
ual characteristics, personality traits and attitudes which concern, for example, self-image
11

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
and one’s view of others and willingness to engage with other people in social interaction.
This type of competence is not seen simply as resulting from immutable personality char-
acteristics. It includes factors which are the product of various kinds of acculturation and
may be modiﬁed.
These personality traits, attitudes and temperaments are parameters which have to be
taken into account in language learning and teaching. Accordingly, even though they
may be difﬁcult to deﬁne, they should be included in a framework of reference. They are
considered to be part of an individual’s general competences and therefore an aspect of
his or her abilities. In so far as they are capable of being acquired or modiﬁed in use and
through learning (for example, of one or more languages), attitude formation may be an
objective. As has frequently been noted, existential competences are culture-related and
therefore sensitive areas for inter-cultural perceptions and relations: the way one
member of a speciﬁc culture expresses friendliness and interest may be perceived by
someone from another culture as aggressive or offensive.
Ability to learn (savoir apprendre, see 5.1.4.) mobilises existential competence, declarative
knowledge and skills, and draws on various types of competence. Ability to learn may
also be conceived as ‘knowing how, or being disposed, to discover “otherness”’ – whether
the other is another language, another culture, other people or new areas of knowledge.
Whilst the notion of ability to learn is of general application, it is particularly relevant
to language learning. Depending on the learners in question, the ability to learn may
involve varying degrees and combinations of such aspects of existential competence,
declarative knowledge and skills and know-how as:
•
Existential competence: e.g. a willingness to take initiatives or even risks in face-to-
face communication, so as to afford oneself the opportunity to speak, to prompt assis-
tance from the people with whom one is speaking, such as asking them to rephrase
what they have said in simpler terms, etc; also listening skills, attention to what is
said, heightened awareness of the risks of cultural misunderstanding in relations
with others.
•
Declarative knowledge: e.g. knowledge of what morpho-syntactical relations corre-
spond to given declension patterns for a particular language; or, awareness that
there may be a taboo or particular rituals associated with dietary or sexual practices
in certain cultures or that they may have religious connotations.
•
Skills and know-how: e.g. facility in using a dictionary or being able to ﬁnd one’s way
easily around a documentation centre; knowing how to manipulate audiovisual or
computer media (e.g. the Internet) as learning resources.
For the same individual there can be many variations in the use of skills and know-how
and the ability to deal with the unknown:
•
Variations according to the event, depending on whether the individual is dealing
with new people, a totally unknown area of knowledge, an unfamiliar culture, a
foreign language.
•
Variations according to context: faced with the same event (e.g. parent/child relation-
ships in a given community), the processes of discovery and seeking meaning will
doubtless be different for an ethnologist, tourist, missionary, journalist, educator or
doctor, each acting according to his or her own discipline or outlook.
12

Approach adopted
•
Variations according to the prevailing circumstances and past experience: it is quite
probable that the skills applied in learning a ﬁfth foreign language will be different
from those applied in learning the ﬁrst.
Such variations should be considered alongside concepts such as ‘learning styles’ or
‘learner proﬁles’ as long as the latter are not regarded as being immutably ﬁxed once and
for all.
For learning purposes, the strategies selected by the individual in order to accomplish
a given task will depend on the diversity of the various abilities to learn at his/her dispo-
sal. But it is also through the diversity of learning experiences, provided they are not
compartmentalised nor strictly repetitive, that the individual extends his/her ability to
learn.
2.1.2
Communicative language competence
Communicative language competence can be considered as comprising several compo-
nents: linguistic, sociolinguistic and pragmatic. Each of these components is postulated as
comprising, in particular, knowledge and skills and know-how. Linguistic competences
include lexical, phonological, syntactical knowledge and skills and other dimensions of
language as system, independently of the sociolinguistic value of its variations and the
pragmatic functions of its realisations. This component, considered here from the point
of view of a given individual’s communicative language competence, relates not only to
the range and quality of knowledge (e.g. in terms of phonetic distinctions made or the
extent and precision of vocabulary) but also to cognitive organisation and the way this
knowledge is stored (e.g. the various associative networks in which the speaker places a
lexical item) and to its accessibility (activation, recall and availability). Knowledge may
be conscious and readily expressible or may not (e.g. once again in relation to mastery
of a phonetic system). Its organisation and accessibility will vary from one individual to
another and vary also within the same individual (e.g. for a plurilingual person depend-
ing on the varieties inherent in his or her plurilingual competence). It can also be held
that the cognitive organisation of vocabulary and the storing of expressions, etc.
depend, amongst other things, on the cultural features of the community or commu-
nities in which the individual has been socialised and where his or her learning has
occurred.
Sociolinguistic competences refer to the sociocultural conditions of language use.
Through its sensitivity to social conventions (rules of politeness, norms governing rela-
tions between generations, sexes, classes and social groups, linguistic codiﬁcation of
certain fundamental rituals in the functioning of a community), the sociolinguistic com-
ponent strictly affects all language communication between representatives of different
cultures, even though participants may often be unaware of its inﬂuence.
Pragmatic competences are concerned with the functional use of linguistic resources
(production of language functions, speech acts), drawing on scenarios or scripts of inter-
actional exchanges. It also concerns the mastery of discourse, cohesion and coherence,
the identiﬁcation of text types and forms, irony, and parody. For this component even
more than the linguistic component, it is hardly necessary to stress the major impact of
interactions and cultural environments in which such abilities are constructed.
13

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
All the categories used here are intended to characterise areas and types of compe-
tences internalised by a social agent, i.e. internal representations, mechanisms and
capacities, the cognitive existence of which can be considered to account for observable
behaviour and performance. At the same time, any learning process will help to develop
or transform these same internal representations, mechanisms and capacities.
Each of these components will be examined in more detail in Chapter 5.
2.1.3
Language activities
The language learner/user’s communicative language competence is activated in the per-
formance of the various language activities, involving reception, production, interaction
or mediation (in particular interpreting or translating). Each of these types of activity is
possible in relation to texts in oral or written form, or both.
As processes, reception and production (oral and/or written) are obviously primary,
since both are required for interaction. In this Framework, however, the use of these
terms for language activities is conﬁned to the role they play in isolation. Receptive
activities include silent reading and following the media. They are also of impor-
tance in many forms of learning (understanding course content, consulting text-
books, works of reference and documents). Productive activities have an important
function in many academic and professional ﬁelds (oral presentations, written
studies and reports) and particular social value is attached to them (judgements
made of what has been submitted in writing or of ﬂuency in speaking and deliver-
ing oral presentations).
In interaction at least two individuals participate in an oral and/or written exchange in
which production and reception alternate and may in fact overlap in oral communica-
tion. Not only may two interlocutors be speaking and yet listening to each other simul-
taneously. Even where turn-taking is strictly respected, the listener is generally already
forecasting the remainder of the speaker’s message and preparing a response. Learning
to interact thus involves more than learning to receive and to produce utterances. High
importance is generally attributed to interaction in language use and learning in view
of its central role in communication.
In both the receptive and productive modes, the written and/or oral activities of medi-
ation make communication possible between persons who are unable, for whatever
reason, to communicate with each other directly. Translation or interpretation, a para-
phrase, summary or record, provides for a third party a (re)formulation of a source text
to which this third party does not have direct access. Mediating language activities –
(re)processing an existing text – occupy an important place in the normal linguistic func-
tioning of our societies.
2.1.4
Domains
Language activities are contextualised within domains. These may themselves be very
diverse, but for most practical purposes in relation to language learning they may be
broadly classiﬁed as fourfold: the public domain, the personal domain, the educational
domain and the occupational domain.
14

Approach adopted
The public domain refers to everything connected with ordinary social interaction (busi-
ness and administrative bodies, public services, cultural and leisure activities of a public
nature, relations with the media, etc.). Complementarily, the personal domain comprises
family relations and individual social practices.
The occupational domain embraces everything concerned with a person’s activities and
relations in the exercise of his or her occupation. The educational domain is concerned
with the learning/training context (generally of an institutional nature) where the aim
is to acquire speciﬁc knowledge or skills.
2.1.5
Tasks, strategies and texts
Communication and learning involve the performance of tasks which are not solely lan-
guage tasks even though they involve language activities and make demands upon the
individual’s communicative competence. To the extent that these tasks are neither
routine nor automatic, they require the use of strategies in communicating and learning.
In so far as carrying out these tasks involves language activities, they necessitate the pro-
cessing (through reception, production, interaction or mediation) of oral or written texts.
The overall approach outlined above is distinctly action-oriented. It is centred on the
relationship between, on the one hand, the agents’ use of strategies linked to their com-
petences and how they perceive or imagine the situation to be and on the other, the task
or tasks to be accomplished in a speciﬁc context under particular conditions.
Thus someone who has to move a wardrobe (task) may try to push it, take it to pieces
so as to carry it more easily and then reassemble it, call on outside labour or give up and
convince himself or herself that it can wait until tomorrow, etc. (all strategies).
Depending on the strategy adopted, the performance (or avoidance, postponement or
redeﬁnition) of the task may or may not involve a language activity and text processing
(reading instructions for dismantling, making a telephone call, etc.). Similarly, a learner
at school who has to translate a text from a foreign language (task) may look to see if a
translation already exists, ask another learner to show what he or she has done, use a dic-
tionary, try to work out some kind of meaning on the basis of the few words or structures
he or she knows, think of a good excuse for not handing in this exercise, etc. (all possible
strategies). For all the cases envisaged here there will necessarily be language activity and
text processing (translation/mediation, verbal negotiation with a classmate, letter or
verbal excuses to the teacher, etc.).
The relationship between strategies, task and text depends on the nature of the task.
This may be primarily language-related, i.e. it may require largely language activities and
the strategies applied relate primarily to these language activities (e.g. reading and com-
menting on a text, completing a ‘ﬁll in the gaps’-type exercise, giving a lecture, taking
notes during a presentation). It may include a language component, i.e. where language
activities form only part of what is required and where the strategies applied relate also
or primarily to other activities (e.g. cooking by following a recipe). It is possible to carry
out many tasks without recourse to a language activity. In these cases, the activities
involved are not necessarily language-related at all and the strategies applied relate to
other types of activity. For instance, erecting a tent can be carried out in silence by several
people who know what they are doing. They may perhaps engage in a few oral exchanges
relating to technique, or they may at the same time hold a conversation having nothing
15

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
at all to do with the task, or they may carry out the task while one of them is humming
a tune. The use of language becomes necessary when one of the group does not know
what to do next, or when for some reason the established routine does not work.
In this type of analysis communication strategies and learning strategies are but strat-
egies among others, just as communicative tasks and learning tasks are but tasks among
others. Similarly, ‘authentic’ texts or texts specially designed for teaching purposes, texts
in textbooks or texts produced by learners are but texts among others.
In the following chapters a detailed account is offered for each dimension and subcat-
egory in turn, with examples and scaling where appropriate. Chapter 4 deals with the
dimension of language use – what a language user or learner is required to do, whilst
Chapter 5 deals with the competences that enable a language user to act.
2.2
Common reference levels of language proﬁciency
In addition to the descriptive scheme glossed above, Chapter 3 provides a ‘vertical dimen-
sion’ and outlines an ascending series of common reference levels for describing learner
proﬁciency. The set of descriptive categories introduced in Chapters 4 and 5 map out a
‘horizontal dimension’ made up of parameters of communicative activity and commu-
nicative language competence. It is quite common to present a series of levels in a series
of parameters as a proﬁling grid with a horizontal and a vertical dimension. This is, of
course, a considerable simpliﬁcation since just the addition of domain, for example,
would give a third dimension turning such a grid into a notional cube. A full diagram-
matic representation of the degree of multidimensionality involved would in fact be very
challenging, if not impossible.
The addition of a vertical dimension to the Framework nevertheless enables learning
space to be mapped or proﬁled, even if simply, and this is useful for a number of reasons:
•
The development of deﬁnitions of learner proﬁciency related to categories used in
the Framework may assist in making more concrete what it may be appropriate to
expect at different levels of achievement in terms of those categories. This in turn
may aid the development of transparent and realistic statements of overall learning
objectives.
•
Learning which takes place over a period of time needs to be organised into units
which take account of progression and can provide continuity. Syllabuses and mate-
rials need to be situated in relation to one another. A framework of levels may help
in this process.
•
Learning efforts in relation to those objectives and those units need also to be situ-
ated on this vertical dimension of progress, i.e. assessed in relation to gains in proﬁ-
ciency. The provision of proﬁciency statements may help in this process.
•
Such assessment should take account of incidental learning, of out-of-school experi-
ence, of the kind of lateral enrichment outlined above. The provision of a set of pro-
ﬁciency statements going beyond the scope of a particular syllabus may be helpful in
this respect.
•
The provision of a common set of proﬁciency statements will facilitate comparisons
of objectives, levels, materials, tests and achievement in different systems and situa-
tions.
16

Approach adopted
•
A framework including both horizontal and vertical dimensions facilitates the deﬁ-
nition of partial objectives and the recognition of uneven proﬁles, partial competen-
cies.
•
A framework of levels and categories facilitating proﬁling of objectives for particular
purposes may aid inspectors. Such a framework may help to assess whether learners
are working at an appropriate level in different areas. It may inform decisions on
whether performance in those areas represents a standard appropriate to the stage
of learning, immediate future goals and wider longer-term goals of effective lan-
guage proﬁciency and personal development.
•
Finally, in their learning career students of the language will pass through a number
of educational sectors and institutions offering language services, and the provision
of a common set of levels may facilitate collaboration between those sectors. With
increased personal mobility, it is more and more common for learners to switch
between educational systems at the end of or even in the middle of their period in a
particular educational sector, making the provision of a common scale on which to
describe their achievement an issue of ever wider concern.
In considering the vertical dimension of the Framework, one should not forget that the
process of language learning is continuous and individual. No two users of a language,
whether native speakers or foreign learners, have exactly the same competences or
develop them in the same way. Any attempt to establish ‘levels’ of proﬁciency is to some
extent arbitrary, as it is in any area of knowledge or skill. However, for practical purposes
it is useful to set up a scale of deﬁned levels to segment the learning process for the pur-
poses of curriculum design, qualifying examinations, etc. Their number and height will
depend largely on how a particular educational system is organised and for which pur-
poses scales are established. It is possible to set down procedures and criteria for scaling
and for the formulation of the descriptors used to characterise successive levels of proﬁ-
ciency. The issues and options concerned are discussed in depth in Appendix A. Users of
this framework are strongly advised to consult that section and the supporting biblio-
graphy before taking independent policy decisions on scaling.
One also needs to remember that levels only reﬂect a vertical dimension. They can take
only limited account of the fact that learning a language is a matter of horizontal as well
as vertical progress as learners acquire the proﬁciency to perform in a wider range of
communicative activities. Progress is not merely a question of moving up a vertical scale.
There is no particular logical requirement for a learner to pass through all the lower
levels on a sub-scale. They may make lateral progress (from a neighbouring category) by
broadening their performance capabilities rather than increasing their proﬁciency in
terms of the same category. Conversely, the expression ‘deepening one’s knowledge’ rec-
ognises that one may well feel the need at some point to underpin such pragmatic gains
by having a look at ‘the basics’ (that is: lower level skills) in an area into which one has
moved laterally.
Finally, one should be careful about interpreting sets of levels and scales of language
proﬁciency as if they were a linear measurement scale like a ruler. No existing scale or
set of levels can claim to be linear in this way. Talking in terms of the series of Council
of Europe content speciﬁcations, even if Waystage is situated halfway to Threshold Level on
a scale of levels, and Threshold half way to Vantage Level, experience with existing scales
suggests that many learners will take more than twice as long to reach Threshold Level
17

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
from Waystage than they needed to reach Waystage. They will then probably need more
than twice as long to reach Vantage Level from Threshold Level than they needed to reach
Threshold Level from Waystage, even if the levels appear to be equidistant on the scale. This
is because of the necessary broadening of the range of activities, skills and language
involved. This fact of life is reﬂected in the frequent presentation of a scale of levels with
a diagram like an ice cream cornet – a three-dimensional cone which broadens towards
the top. Extreme caution should be exercised in using any scale of levels to calculate the
‘mean seat time’ necessary to meet particular objectives.
2.3
Language learning and teaching
2.3.1
Such statements of learning objectives say nothing about the processes by which
learners come to be able to act in the required ways, or the processes by which they
develop/build up the competences that make the actions possible. They say nothing
about the ways in which teachers facilitate the processes of language acquisition and
learning. Yet, since it is one of the principal functions of the Framework to encourage
and enable all the different partners to the language teaching and learning processes to
inform others as transparently as possible not only of their aims and objectives but also
of the methods they use and the results actually achieved, it seems clear that the
Framework cannot conﬁne itself to the knowledge, skills and attitudes learners will need
to develop in order to act as competent language users, but must also deal with the pro-
cesses of language acquisition and learning, as well as with the teaching methodology.
These matters are dealt with in Chapter 6.
2.3.2
The role of the Framework in respect of language acquisition, learning and teach-
ing must however be made clear once more. In accordance with the basic principles of
pluralist democracy, the Framework aims to be not only comprehensive, transparent and
coherent, but also open, dynamic and non-dogmatic. For that reason it cannot take up a
position on one side or another of current theoretical disputes on the nature of language
acquisition and its relation to language learning, nor should it embody any one particu-
lar approach to language teaching to the exclusion of all others. Its proper role is to
encourage all those involved as partners to the language learning/teaching process to
state as explicitly and transparently as possible their own theoretical basis and their prac-
tical procedures. In order to fulﬁl this role it sets out parameters, categories, criteria and
scales which users may draw upon and which may possibly stimulate them to consider
a wider range of options than previously or to question the previously unexamined
assumptions of the tradition in which they are working. This is not to say that such
assumptions are wrong, but only that all those responsible for planning should beneﬁt
from a re-examination of theory and practice in which they can take into account deci-
sions other practitioners have taken in their own and, particularly, in other European
countries.
An open, ‘neutral’ framework of reference does not of course imply an absence of
policy. In providing such a framework the Council of Europe is not in any way retreating
from the principles set out in Chapter 1 above as well as in Recommendations R (82) 18
and R (98) 6 of the Committee of Ministers addressed to member governments.
18

Approach adopted
2.3.3
Chapters 4 and 5 are mainly concerned with the actions and competences
required of a language user/learner in respect of any one language in order to communi-
cate with other users of that language. Much of Chapter 6 relates to ways in which the
necessary abilities can be developed and how that development can be facilitated.
Chapter 7 takes a closer look at the role of tasks in language use and language learning.
However, the full implications of adopting a plurilingual and pluricultural approach
have yet to be explored. Chapter 6 therefore also examines the nature and development
of plurilingual competence. Its implications for the diversiﬁcation of language teaching
and educational policies are then explored in some detail in Chapter 8.
2.4
Language assessment
The CEF is ‘A common European framework for language learning, teaching and assess-
ment’. Up to this point, the focus has been upon the nature of language use and the lan-
guage user and the implications for learning and teaching.
In Chapter 9, the ﬁnal chapter, attention is concentrated on the functions of the
Framework in relation to the assessment of language proﬁciency. The chapter outlines
three main ways in which the Framework can be used:
1.
for the speciﬁcation of the content of tests and examinations.
2.
for stating the criteria for the attainment of a learning objective, both in relation to
the assessment of a particular spoken or written performance, and in relation to con-
tinuous teacher-, peer- or self-assessment.
3.
for describing the levels of proﬁciency in existing tests and examinations thus ena-
bling comparisons to be made across different systems of qualiﬁcations.
The chapter then lays out in some detail the choices that have to be made by those con-
ducting assessment procedures. The choices are presented in the form of contrasting
pairs. In each case the terms used are clearly deﬁned and the relative advantages and dis-
advantages are discussed in relation to the purpose of the assessment in its educational
context. The implications of exercising one or another of the alternative options are also
stated.
The chapter proceeds to consider questions of feasibility in assessment. The approach
is based on the observation that a practical scheme of assessment cannot be over elab-
orate. Judgement must be used as to the amount of detail to be included, for instance, in
a published examination syllabus, in relation to the very detailed decisions that have to
be made in setting an actual examination paper or establishing a test bank. Assessors, par-
ticularly of oral performance, have to work under considerable time pressure and can
only handle a strictly limited number of criteria. Learners who wish to assess their own
proﬁciency, say as a guide to what they should tackle next, have more time, but will need
to be selective concerning the components of overall communicative competence rele-
vant to them. This illustrates the more general principle that the Framework must be com-
prehensive, but all its users must be selective. Selectivity may well involve the use of a
simpler classiﬁcatory scheme which, as we have seen in relation to ‘communicative activ-
ities’ may well collapse categories separated in the general scheme. On the other hand,
the user’s purposes may well mean expanding some categories and their exponents in
19

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
areas of special relevance. The chapter discusses the issues raised and illustrates the dis-
cussion by presenting the schemes adopted by a number of examining bodies for proﬁ-
ciency assessment criteria.
For many users, Chapter 9 will enable them to approach public examination syllabuses
in a more insightful and critical manner, raising their expectations of what information
examining bodies should provide concerning the objectives, content, criteria and proce-
dures for qualifying examinations at national and international level (e.g. ALTE, ICC).
Teacher trainers will ﬁnd it useful for raising awareness of assessment issues among
teachers in initial and in-service training. However, teachers are becoming increasingly
responsible for the assessment of their pupils and students at all levels, both formative
and summative. Learners, too, are increasingly called upon to carry out self-assessment,
whether to chart and plan their learning or to report their ability to communicate in lan-
guages which they have not been formally taught, but which contribute to their pluri-
lingual development.
The introduction of a European Language Portfolio with international currency is now
under consideration. The Portfolio would make it possible for learners to document their
progress towards plurilingual competence by recording learning experiences of all kinds
over a wide range of languages, much of which would otherwise be unattested and unrec-
ognised. It is intended that the Portfolio will encourage learners to include a regularly
updated statement of their self-assessed proﬁciency in each language. It will be of great
importance for the credibility of the document for entries to be made responsibly and
transparently. Here reference to CEF will be particularly valuable.
Those professionally involved in test development as well as in the administration and
conduct of public examinations may wish to consult Chapter 9 in conjunction with the
more specialised Guide for Examiners (document CC-Lang(96)10 rev). This guide, which
deals in detail with test development and evaluation is complementary to Chapter 9. It
also contains suggestions for further reading, an appendix on item analysis and a glos-
sary of terms.
20

3
Common Reference Levels
3.1
Criteria for descriptors for Common Reference Levels
One of the aims of the Framework is to help partners to describe the levels of proﬁciency
required by existing standards, tests and examinations in order to facilitate comparisons
between different systems of qualiﬁcations. For this purpose the Descriptive Scheme and
the Common Reference Levels have been developed. Between them they provide a con-
ceptual grid which users can exploit to describe their system. Ideally a scale of reference
levels in a common framework should meet the following four criteria. Two relate to
description issues, and two relate to measurement issues:
Description Issues
•
A common framework scale should be context-free in order to accommodate generalis-
able results from different speciﬁc contexts. That is to say that a common scale
should not be produced specifically for, let us say, the school context and then
applied to adults, or vice-versa. Yet at the same time the descriptors in a common
Framework scale need to be context-relevant, relatable to or translatable into each and
every relevant context – and appropriate for the function they are used for in that
context. This means that the categories used to describe what learners can do in dif-
ferent contexts of use must be relatable to the target contexts of use of the different
groups of learners within the overall target population.
•
The description also needs to be based on theories of language competence. This is dif-
ﬁcult to achieve because the available theory and research is inadequate to provide
a basis for such a description. Nevertheless, the categorisation and description needs
to be theoretically grounded. In addition, whilst relating to theory, the description
must also remain user-friendly – accessible to practitioners. It should encourage them
to think further about what competence means in their context.
Measurement Issues
•
The points on the scale at which particular activities and competences are situated
in a common framework scale should be objectively determined in that they are based
on a theory of measurement. This is in order to avoid systematising error through
adopting unfounded conventions and ‘rules of thumb’ from the authors, particular
groups of practitioners or existing scales that are consulted.
•
The number of levels adopted should be adequate to show progression in different
sectors, but, in any particular context, should not exceed the number of levels
between which people are capable of making reasonably consistent distinctions. This
may mean adopting different sizes of scale step for different dimensions, or a
21

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
two-tier approach between broader (common, conventional) and narrower (local,
pedagogic) levels.
These criteria are very difﬁcult to meet, but are useful as a point of orientation. They can
in fact be met by a combination of intuitive, qualitative and quantitative methods. This is
in contrast to the purely intuitive ways in which scales of language proﬁciency are nor-
mally developed. Intuitive, committee authorship may work well for the development of
systems for particular contexts, but have certain limitations in relation to the development
of a common framework scale. The main weakness of reliance on intuition is that the
placement of a particular wording at a particular level is subjective. Secondly there is also
the possibility that users from different sectors may have valid differences of perspective
due to the needs of their learners. A scale, like a test, has validity in relation to contexts in
which it has been shown to work. Validation – which involves some quantitative analysis
– is an ongoing and, theoretically never-ending, process. The methodology used in devel-
oping the Common Reference Levels, and their illustrative descriptors, has therefore been
fairly rigorous. A systematic combination of intuitive, qualitative and quantitative
methods was employed. First, the content of existing scales was analysed in relation to cat-
egories of description used in the Framework. Then, in an intuitive phase, this material
was edited, new descriptors were formulated, and the set discussed by experts. Next a
variety of qualitative methods were used to check that teachers could relate to the descrip-
tive categories selected, and that descriptors actually described the categories they were
intended to describe. Finally, the best descriptors in the set were scaled using quantitative
methods. The accuracy of this scaling has since been checked in replication studies.
Technical issues connected with the development and scaling of descriptions of lan-
guage proﬁciency are considered in the appendices. Appendix A gives an introduction to
scales and scaling plus methodologies which can be adopted in development. Appendix
B gives a brief overview of the Swiss National Science Research Council project which
developed the Common Reference Levels, and their illustrative descriptors, in a project
covering different educational sectors. Appendices C and D then introduce two related
European projects which have since used a similar methodology to develop and validate
such descriptors in relation to young adults. In Appendix C the DIALANG project is
described. As part of a wider assessment instrument, DIALANG has extended and
adapted for self-assessment descriptors from the CEF. In Appendix D the ALTE
(Association of Language Testers in Europe) ‘Can Do’ project is described. This project has
developed and validated a large set of descriptors, which can also be related to the
Common Reference Levels. These descriptors complement those in the Framework itself
in that they are organised in relation to domains of use which are relevant to adults.
The projects described in the appendices demonstrate a very considerable degree of
communality with regard both to the Common Reference Levels themselves and to the
concepts scaled to different levels in the illustrative descriptors. That is to say that there
is already a growing body of evidence to suggest that the criteria outlined above are at
least partially fulﬁlled.
3.2
The Common Reference Levels
There does appear in practice to be a wide, though by no means universal, consensus on
the number and nature of levels appropriate to the organisation of language learning
22

Common Reference Levels
and the public recognition of achievement. It seems that an outline framework of six
broad levels gives an adequate coverage of the learning space relevant to European lan-
guage learners for these purposes.
•
Breakthrough, corresponding to what Wilkins in his 1978 proposal labelled ‘Formulaic
Proﬁciency’, and Trim in the same publication1 ‘Introductory’.
•
Waystage, reﬂecting the Council of Europe content speciﬁcation.
•
Threshold, reﬂecting the Council of Europe content speciﬁcation.
•
Vantage, reﬂecting the third Council of Europe content speciﬁcation, a level
described as ‘Limited Operational Proﬁciency’ by Wilkins, and ‘adequate response to situa-
tions normally encountered’ by Trim.
•
Effective Operational Proﬁciency which was called ‘Effective Proﬁciency’ by Trim, ‘Adequate
Operational Proﬁciency’ by Wilkins, and represents an advanced level of competence
suitable for more complex work and study tasks.
•
Mastery (Trim: ‘comprehensive mastery’; Wilkins: ‘Comprehensive Operational Proﬁciency’),
corresponds to the top examination objective in the scheme adopted by ALTE
(Association of Language Testers in Europe). It could be extended to include the more
developed intercultural competence above that level which is achieved by many lan-
guage professionals.
When one looks at these six levels, however, one sees that they are respectively higher and
lower interpretations of the classic division into basic, intermediate and advanced. Also,
some of the names given to Council of Europe speciﬁcations for levels have proved resist-
ant to translation (e.g. Waystage, Vantage). The scheme therefore proposed adopts a ‘hyper-
text’ branching principle, starting from an initial division into three broad levels – A, B
and C:
A
B
C
Basic User
Independent User
Proﬁcient User
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
(Breakthrough) (Waystage)
(Threshold)
(Vantage)
(Effective
(Mastery)
Operational
Proﬁciency)
Figure 1
3.3
Presentation of Common Reference Levels
The establishment of a set of common reference points in no way limits how different
sectors in different pedagogic cultures may choose to organise or describe their system
of levels and modules. It is also to be expected that the precise formulation of the set of
common reference points, the wording of the descriptors, will develop over time as the
1 Trim, J. L. M. 1978 Some Possible Lines of Development of an Overall Structure for a European Unit Credit Scheme for Foreign
Language Learning by Adults, Council of Europe.
23

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
experience of member states and of institutions with related expertise is incorporated
into the description.
It is also desirable that the common reference points are presented in different ways
for different purposes. For some purposes it will be appropriate to summarise the set of
proposed Common Reference Levels in single holistic paragraphs, as shown in Table 1.
Such a simple ‘global’ representation will make it easier to communicate the system to
non-specialist users and will also provide teachers and curriculum planners with orien-
tation points:
Table 1. Common Reference Levels: global scale
C2
Can understand with ease virtually everything heard or read. Can summarise
information from different spoken and written sources, reconstructing
arguments and accounts in a coherent presentation. Can express him/herself
spontaneously, very ﬂuently and precisely, differentiating ﬁner shades of
meaning even in more complex situations.
Proﬁcient
User
C1
Can understand a wide range of demanding, longer texts, and recognise
implicit meaning. Can express him/herself ﬂuently and spontaneously
without much obvious searching for expressions. Can use language ﬂexibly
and effectively for social, academic and professional purposes. Can produce
clear, well-structured, detailed text on complex subjects, showing controlled
use of organisational patterns, connectors and cohesive devices.
B2
Can understand the main ideas of complex text on both concrete and
abstract topics, including technical discussions in his/her ﬁeld of
specialisation. Can interact with a degree of ﬂuency and spontaneity that
makes regular interaction with native speakers quite possible without strain
for either party. Can produce clear, detailed text on a wide range of subjects
and explain a viewpoint on a topical issue giving the advantages and
Independent
disadvantages of various options.
User
B1
Can understand the main points of clear standard input on familiar matters
regularly encountered in work, school, leisure, etc. Can deal with most
situations likely to arise whilst travelling in an area where the language is
spoken. Can produce simple connected text on topics which are familiar or of
personal interest. Can describe experiences and events, dreams, hopes and
ambitions and brieﬂy give reasons and explanations for opinions and plans.
A2
Can understand sentences and frequently used expressions related to areas of
most immediate relevance (e.g. very basic personal and family information,
shopping, local geography, employment). Can communicate in simple and
routine tasks requiring a simple and direct exchange of information on
familiar and routine matters. Can describe in simple terms aspects of his/her
background, immediate environment and matters in areas of immediate
Basic
need.
User
A1
Can understand and use familiar everyday expressions and very basic phrases
aimed at the satisfaction of needs of a concrete type. Can introduce
him/herself and others and can ask and answer questions about personal
details such as where he/she lives, people he/she knows and things he/she
has. Can interact in a simple way provided the other person talks slowly and
clearly and is prepared to help.
24

Common Reference Levels
In order to orient learners, teachers and other users within the educational system for
some practical purpose, however, a more detailed overview is likely to be necessary. Such
an overview can be presented in the form of a grid showing major categories of language
use at each of the six levels. The example in Table 2 (on the next two pages) is a draft for
a self-assessment orientation tool based on the six levels. It is intended to help learners
to proﬁle their main language skills, and decide at which level they might look at a
checklist of more detailed descriptors in order to self-assess their level of proﬁciency.
For other purposes, it may be desirable to focus on a particular spectrum of levels, and
a particular set of categories. By restricting the range of levels and categories covered to
those relevant to a particular purpose, it will be possible to add more detail: ﬁner levels
and categories. Such detail would enable a set of modules to be ‘mapped’ relative to one
another – and also to be situated in relation to the Common Framework.
Alternatively, rather than proﬁling categories of communicative activities, one may
wish to assess a performance on the basis of the aspects of communicative language com-
petence one can deduce from it. The chart in Table 3 was designed to assess spoken per-
formances. It focuses on different qualitative aspects of language use.
3.4
Illustrative descriptors
The three tables used to introduce the Common Reference Levels (Tables 1, 2 and 3) are
summarised from a bank of ‘illustrative descriptors’ developed and validated for the CEF
in the research project described in Appendix B. These formulations have been mathe-
matically scaled to these levels by analysing the way in which they have been interpreted
in the assessment of large numbers of learners.
For ease of consultation, scales of descriptors are juxtaposed to the relevant categories
of the descriptive scheme in Chapters 4 and 5. The descriptors refer to the following three
metacategories in the descriptive scheme:
Communicative activities
‘Can Do’ descriptors are provided for reception, interaction and production. There may
not be descriptors for all sub-categories for every level, since some activities cannot be
undertaken until a certain level of competence has been reached, whilst others may
cease to be an objective at higher levels.
Strategies
‘Can Do’ descriptors are provided for some of the strategies employed in performing com-
municative activities. Strategies are seen as a hinge between the learner’s resources (com-
petences) and what he/she can do with them (communicative activities). The principles
of a) planning action, b) balancing resources and compensating for deﬁciencies during
execution and c) monitoring results and undertaking repair as necessary are described
in the sections dealing with interaction and production strategies in Chapter 4.
25

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Table 2. Common Reference Levels: self-assessment grid
A1
A2
B1
Listening
I can recognise familiar
I can understand phrases
I can understand the main
words and very basic
and the highest frequency
points of clear standard
phrases concerning
vocabulary related to areas
speech on familiar matters
myself, my family and
of most immediate personal
regularly encountered in
immediate concrete
relevance (e.g. very basic
work, school, leisure, etc. I
U
surroundings when
personal and family
can understand the main
N
people speak slowly
information, shopping,
point of many radio or TV
D
and clearly.
local area, employment).
programmes on current
E
I can catch the main point in
affairs or topics of personal
R
short, clear, simple messages
or professional interest when
S
and announcements.
the delivery is relatively slow
T
and clear.
A
N
Reading
I can understand
I can read very short, simple
I can understand texts that
D
familiar names, words
texts. I can ﬁnd speciﬁc,
consist mainly of high
I
and very simple
predictable information in
frequency everyday or job-
N
sentences, for example
simple everyday material
related language. I can
G
on notices and posters
such as advertisements,
understand the description of
or in catalogues.
prospectuses, menus and
events, feelings and wishes in
timetables and I can
personal letters.
understand short simple
personal letters.
Spoken
I can interact in a simple
I can communicate in simple
I can deal with most situations
Interaction
way provided the other
and routine tasks requiring a
likely to arise whilst travelling
person is prepared to
simple and direct exchange of
in an area where the language
repeat or rephrase things
information on familiar topics
is spoken. I can enter
at a slower rate of speech
and activities. I can handle
unprepared into conversation
and help me formulate
very short social exchanges,
on topics that are familiar, of
what I’m trying to say. I
even though I can’t usually
personal interest or pertinent
S
can ask and answer simple
understand enough to keep
to everyday life (e.g. family,
P
questions in areas of
the conversation going myself.
hobbies, work, travel and
E
immediate need or on
current events).
A
very familiar topics.
K
I
Spoken
I can use simple phrases
I can use a series of phrases
I can connect phrases in a
N
Production
and sentences to describe
and sentences to describe in
simple way in order to describe
G
where I live and people I
simple terms my family and
experiences and events, my
know.
other people, living
dreams, hopes and ambitions.
conditions, my educational
I can brieﬂy give reasons and
background and my present
explanations for opinions and
or most recent job.
plans. I can narrate a story or
relate the plot of a book or
ﬁlm and describe my reactions.
Writing
I can write a short, simple
I can write short, simple notes
I can write simple connected
postcard, for example
and messages relating to
text on topics which are
W
sending holiday greetings.
matters in areas of immediate
familiar or of personal interest.
R
I can ﬁll in forms with
need. I can write a very simple
I can write personal letters
I
personal details, for
personal letter, for example
describing experiences and
T
example entering my
thanking someone for
impressions.
I
name, nationality and
something.
N
address on a hotel
G
registration form.
26

Common Reference Levels
B2
C1
C2
I can understand extended speech
I can understand extended speech
I have no difﬁculty in understanding
and lectures and follow even
even when it is not clearly
any kind of spoken language,
complex lines of argument provided
structured and when relationships
whether live or broadcast, even when
the topic is reasonably familiar. I
are only implied and not signalled
delivered at fast native speed,
can understand most TV news and
explicitly. I can understand
provided I have some time to get
current affairs programmes. I can
television programmes and ﬁlms
familiar with the accent.
understand the majority of ﬁlms in
without too much effort.
standard dialect.
I can read articles and reports
I can understand long and
I can read with ease virtually all
concerned with contemporary
complex factual and literary
forms of the written language,
problems in which the writers adopt
texts, appreciating distinctions of
including abstract, structurally or
particular attitudes or viewpoints. I
style. I can understand specialised
linguistically complex texts such as
can understand contemporary
articles and longer technical
manuals, specialised articles and
literary prose.
instructions, even when they do
literary works.
not relate to my ﬁeld.
I can interact with a degree of
I can express myself ﬂuently and
I can take part effortlessly in any
ﬂuency and spontaneity that makes
spontaneously without much
conversation or discussion and have a
regular interaction with native
obvious searching for expressions.
good familiarity with idiomatic
speakers quite possible. I can take an
I can use language ﬂexibly and
expressions and colloquialisms. I can
active part in discussion in familiar
effectively for social and
express myself ﬂuently and convey
contexts, accounting for and
professional purposes. I can
ﬁner shades of meaning precisely. If I
sustaining my views.
formulate ideas and opinions with
do have a problem I can backtrack
precision and relate my
and restructure around the difﬁculty
contribution skilfully to those of
so smoothly that other people are
other speakers.
hardly aware of it.
I can present clear, detailed
I can present clear, detailed
I can present a clear, smoothly
descriptions on a wide range of
descriptions of complex subjects
ﬂowing description or argument in a
subjects related to my ﬁeld of
integrating sub-themes, developing
style appropriate to the context and
interest. I can explain a viewpoint on
particular points and rounding off
with an effective logical structure
a topical issue giving the advantages
with an appropriate conclusion.
which helps the recipient to notice
and disadvantages of various options.
and remember signiﬁcant points.
I can write clear, detailed text on a
I can express myself in clear, well-
I can write clear, smoothly ﬂowing
wide range of subjects related to my
structured text, expressing points
text in an appropriate style. I can
interests. I can write an essay or
of view at some length. I can write
write complex letters, reports or
report, passing on information or
about complex subjects in a
articles which present a case with an
giving reasons in support of or
letter, an essay or a report,
effective logical structure which
against a particular point of view. I
underlining what I consider to be
helps the recipient to notice and
can write letters highlighting the
the salient issues. I can select
remember signiﬁcant points. I can
personal signiﬁcance of events and
style appropriate to the reader
write summaries and reviews of
experiences.
in mind.
professional or literary works.
27

e
ns
o
ell-
ns,
er
er
o link
CE
her
,
e of
h,
y be
ed number
vices t
ang
wing, w
ances int
vices.
e de
er
piness’ in a
OHEREN
e coherent and
here ma
C
e discourse
ors and ot
e de
y ﬂo
ors and cohesiv
hl
, coherent discourse,
anisational patt
wing controlled use of
anisational patt
vices.
t
e use of a variety of
Can creat
cohesiv
making full and appropri-
a
org
and a wide r
c
onnect
cohesiv
Can produce clear
smoot
s
t
r
uctured speec
sho
org
connect
de
Can use a limit
of cohesiv
his/her utt
clear
t
hough t
some ‘jum
long contribution.
v
e
e
a
ase
e
o
o
h
y
w
et or
o
y t
ming
ers.
his
he
ona-
er
o g
h ease and
ntaking,
vailable
ace his
CTION
wn
s do t
A
y a
der t
y
a
c.
al tur
c.
o pref
her speak
e discourse, tak
n when
e and end
hough he/she
act wit
y
. Can int
round conﬁr
king up and using
he ﬂoor and t
er
s in or
y
. Can help t
INTER
o, t
erbal and int
r
tlessl
e of discourse
e his/her o
ersation when he/she
y natur
rencing, allusion
eep t
prehension, inviting
y not alw
antl
f
o
e
a
hers in, et
Can int
skill, pic
non-v
tional cues apparentl
ef
his/her contribution int
t
he joint discourse wit
full
ref
making, et
Can select a suitable phr
f
rom a readil
r
ang
functions t
remark
t
o k
relat
contributions skilfull
t
hose of ot
Can initiat
his/her tur
appropriat
conv
needs t
m
eleg
discussion along on
f
amiliar g
com
ot
h
y
,

al,

,

w
h wit
w
y a
e.
v
en
e
king
y
y e
ac
dl
hes of
ns and
y
. Onl
cult
c
airl
CY
uial ﬂo
ﬁ
er
ﬁculty so
he
e use
y at lengt
tret
h a f
y dif
y dif
hat t
r
tlessl
w of languag
hough he/she can
FLUEN
or is har
f
o
or patt
y long pauses.
al colloq
y t
e wit
hl
y and spontaneousl
t ef
h ﬂo
hes f
c
erlocut
po; alt
are of it.
en languag
v
oiding or backtr
w
m
Can express him/herself
spontaneousl
a natur
a
around an
smoot
int
a
Can express him/herself
ﬂuentl
almos
conceptuall
subject can hinder a natur
smoot
Can produce s
languag
t
e
be hesitant as he/she
sear
expressions. There are f
noticeabl
wise
d
e
v
en
her
ar
are,
oring
Y
r
w
C
t
ent
e, e
o
r
ammatical
ed when
y high
A
el
e aspects of spok
rect
.
y maintains a
rors are r
r
ammatical
h cause mis-
t of his/her
ativ
CCUR
o spot and
A
ention is ot
ree of g
y cor
ed (e.g. in f
t
entl
t
anding, and can
es.
acy; er
all
ualit
plex languag
q
ag
ﬁcult t
y do occur
ws a relativ
ree of g
rect mos
t
ak
r
ammatical control of
t
hers’ reactions).
e
ener
rors whic
Maintains consis
g
com
while att
eng
planning, in monit
o
Consis
high deg
accur
dif
g
t
h
Sho
deg
control. Does not mak
er
unders
cor
mis
v
els:
.
e
al
e
e
or
ms
e
o
plex
ants
e of
o giv
ener
ence Le
or
o giv
h
o select a
t g
er
y
, t
rentiat
ving t
hing f
ang
E
tic f
f
e
o do so.
e ambiguity
G
o express him/
al, academic,
N
y in an
tyle on a wide
ms t
A
o dif
e of languag
e s
R
uialisms.
ener
hout ha
o be able t
hout muc
or
reat ﬂexibility
y ﬁner shades of
ﬁcient r
e
ang
e t
o eliminat
e of g
y
.
Common Ref
ws g
r
mulating ideas in
essional or leisure
ence f
o
f
ering linguis
phasis, t
wing him/her t
r
mulation t
trict what he/she w
sa
wpoints on mos
r
ds, using some com
o
Sho
ref
dif
t
o conv
meaning precisel
em
and t
Also has a good command
of idiomatic expressions
and colloq
Has a good command of a
broad r
allo
f
o
herself clearl
appropriat
r
ang
prof
t
opics wit
res
t
o
Has a suf
languag
clear descriptions, express
vie
t
opics, wit
conspicuous searc
w
sent
able 3.
C2
C1
B2+
B2
T

ds
ple
or
ors
e
roups
y basic
e sim
er
ors lik
o a
ds or g
h v
roups of w
or
hen’.
ed, linear
ple connect
r
, discret
ds wit
t
e
uence of points.
h sim
or
e ‘and’, ‘but’ and
Can link a series of
shor
elements int
connect
seq
Can link g
wit
lik
‘because’.
Can link w
of w
linear connect
‘and’ or ‘t
hat
k
e
eep
y
.
ace
o k
wing
otall
o-f
opics t
o
er
tions and
d.
act in a
ollo
ple
er
ace-t
m mutual
ues
e, maintain and
y able t
ple f
er q
o sim
y but
wn accor
a
t. Can repeat bac
t
anding.
arel
t
and enough t
ersation on t
asing and repair
amiliar or of personal
o conﬁr
ersation going of
tions about personal
eres
t of what someone has
ements. Can indicat
ple w
ues
Can initiat
close sim
conv
are f
int
par
said t
unders
Can answ
respond t
s
t
at
when he/she is f
but is r
unders
conv
his/her o
Can ask and answ
q
details. Can int
sim
communication is t
dependent on repetition,
rephr
h
or
t
hough
e less
y in
y
t,
h f
o repair
er
v
en t
y shor
hough
ts and
ticulat
y shor
y
, e
er
y pre-
ances, wit
o searc
r
ammatical and
tar
er
hes of free
v
en t
er
o ar
c
ds, and t
e v
or
or g
tret
e him/herself
alse s
t
ood in v
ed utt
eep going
vident, especiall
ed, mainl
prehensibl
e
er s
ances, e
r
mulation are v
r
y
er
o
vident.
Can k
com
pausing f
lexical planning and repair is
v
e
long
production.
Can mak
unders
utt
pauses, f
ref
e
Can manag
isolat
packag
much pausing t
expressions, t
f
amiliar w
communication.
y a
el
at
y used
ns
uctures
er
tr
es basic
ence
uentl
ed control
r
ammatical
y accur
h more
ple s
till
y mak
ple g
y limit
ed wit
y
, but s
es.
sim
t
oire of freq
w
ns in a memorised
e
t
oire.
rectl
er
t
ematicall
tak
ws onl
is
Uses reasonabl
reper
‘
routines’ and patt
associat
predictable situations.
Uses some sim
cor
sys
m
Sho
of a f
s
t
r
uctures and sent
patt
reper
et
ns
ases
o g
ork,
er
t
oire
e
e t
y
,
v
ents.
ases,
ts, w
ds and
o
ed
ple
or
ple phr
amil
eres
rent e
ence patt
der t
w w
e limit
ﬁcient
o express him/
e
y t
h some hesitation
y basic reper
y situations.
o personal details
ticular concret
h suf
er
ds and sim
mation in sim
yda
or
ed t
v
el, and cur
h memorised phr
or
y
, wit
a
r
oups of a f
r
mulae in or
v
er
Has enough languag
b
v
ocabular
herself wit
and circumlocutions on
t
opics such as f
hobbies and int
tr
Uses basic sent
wit
g
f
o
communicat
inf
e
Has a v
of w
relat
and par
situations.
B1+
B1
A2+
A2
A1

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Communicative language competences
Scaled descriptors are provided for aspects of linguistic competence and pragmatic com-
petence, and for sociolinguistic competence. Certain aspects of competence do not seem
to be amenable to deﬁnition at all levels; distinctions have been made where they have
been shown to be meaningful.
Descriptors need to remain holistic in order to give an overview; detailed lists of micro-
functions, grammatical forms and vocabulary are presented in language speciﬁcations
for particular languages (e.g. Threshold Level 1990). An analysis of the functions, notions,
grammar and vocabulary necessary to perform the communicative tasks described on
the scales could be part of the process of developing new sets of language speciﬁcations.
General competences implied by such a module (e.g. Knowledge of the World, Cognitive
skills) could be listed in similar fashion.
The descriptors juxtaposed with the text in Chapters 4 and 5:
•
Draw, in their formulation, upon the experience of many bodies active in the ﬁeld of
deﬁning levels of proﬁciency.
•
Have been developed in tandem with the development of the model presented in
Chapters 4 and 5 through an interaction between (a) the theoretical work of the
authoring group, (b) the analysis of existing scales of proﬁciency and (c) the practical
workshops with teachers. Whilst not providing fully comprehensive coverage of the
categories presented in Chapters 4 and 5, the set gives an indication of the possible
appearance of a set of descriptors which would do so.
•
Have been matched to the set of Common Reference Levels: A1 (Breakthrough), A2
(Waystage), B1 (Threshold), B2 (Vantage), C1 (Effective Operational Proﬁciency) and C2
(Mastery).
•
Meet the criteria outlined in Appendix A for effective descriptors in that each is brief,
is clear and transparent, is positively formulated, describes something deﬁnite and
has independent, stand-alone integrity – not relying on the formulation of other
descriptors for its interpretation.
•
Have been found transparent, useful and relevant by groups of non-native and native-
speaker teachers from a variety of educational sectors with very different proﬁles in
terms of linguistic training and teaching experience. Teachers appear to understand
the descriptors in the set, which has been reﬁned in workshops with them from an
initial pool of some thousands of examples.
•
Are relevant to the description of actual learner achievement in lower and upper sec-
ondary, vocational and adult education, and could thus represent realistic objec-
tives.
•
Have been (with noted exceptions) ‘objectively calibrated’ to a common scale. This
means that the position of the vast majority of the descriptors on the scale is the
product of the way in which they have been interpreted to assess the achievement of
learners, and not just on the basis of the opinion of the authors.
•
Provide a bank of criterion statements about the continuum of foreign language pro-
ﬁciency which can be exploited ﬂexibly for the development of criterion-referenced
assessment. They can be matched to existing local systems, elaborated by local experi-
ence and/or used to develop new sets of objectives.
30

Common Reference Levels
The set as a whole, whilst not being fully comprehensive and having been scaled in one
(admittedly multi-lingual, multi-sector) context of foreign language learning in instruc-
tional settings:
•
is ﬂexible. The same set of descriptors can be organised – as here – into the set of
broad ‘conventional levels’ identiﬁed at the Rüschlikon Symposium, used by the
European Commission’s DIALANG Project (see Appendix C), as well as by ALTE (The
Association of Language Testers in Europe) (see Appendix D). They can also be pre-
sented as narrower ‘pedagogic levels’.
•
is coherent from the point of view of content. Similar or identical elements which
were included in different descriptors proved to have very similar scale values. These
scale values also, to a very large extent, conﬁrm the intentions of authors of the scales
of language proﬁciency used as sources. They also appear to relate coherently to the
content of Council of Europe speciﬁcations, as well as the levels being proposed by
DIALANG and ALTE.
3.5
Flexibility in a branching approach
Level A1 (Breakthrough) is probably the lowest ‘level’ of generative language proﬁciency
which can be identiﬁed. Before this stage is reached, however, there may be a range of
speciﬁc tasks which learners can perform effectively using a very restricted range of lan-
guage and which are relevant to the needs of the learners concerned. The 1994–5 Swiss
National Science Research Council Survey, which developed and scaled the illustrative
descriptors, identiﬁed a band of language use, limited to the performance of isolated
tasks, which can be presupposed in the deﬁnition of Level A1. In certain contexts, for
example with young learners, it may be appropriate to elaborate such a ‘milestone’. The
following descriptors relate to simple, general tasks, which were scaled below Level A1,
but can constitute useful objectives for beginners:
•
can make simple purchases where pointing or other gesture can support the verbal
reference;
•
can ask and tell day, time of day and date;
•
can use some basic greetings;
•
can say yes, no, excuse me, please, thank you, sorry;
•
can ﬁll in uncomplicated forms with personal details, name, address, nationality,
marital status;
•
can write a short, simple postcard.
The descriptors above concern ‘real life’ tasks of a tourist nature. In a school learning
context, one could imagine a separate list of ‘pedagogic tasks’, including ludic aspects of
language – especially in primary schools.
Secondly, the Swiss empirical results suggest a scale of 9 more or less equally sized, coher-
ent levels as shown in Figure 2. This scale has steps between A2 (Waystage) and B1 (Threshold),
between B1 (Threshold) and B2 (Vantage), and between B2 (Vantage) and C1 (Effective Operational
Proﬁciency). The possible existence of such narrower levels may be of interest in learning con-
texts, but can still be related to the broader levels conventional in examining contexts.
31

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
A
B
C
Basic User
Independent User
Proﬁcient User
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
A2+
B1+
B2+
Figure 2
In the illustrative descriptors a distinction is made between the ‘criterion levels’ (e.g. A2
or A2.1) and the ‘plus levels’ (e.g. A2+ or A2.2). The latter are distinguished from the
former by a horizontal line, as in this example for overall listening comprehension.
Table 4. Levels A2.1 and A2.2 (A2+): listening comprehension
Can understand enough to be able to meet needs of a concrete type provided speech is clearly
and slowly articulated.
A2
Can understand phrases and expressions related to areas of most immediate priority (e.g.
very basic personal and family information, shopping, local geography, employment) pro-
vided speech is clearly and slowly articulated.
Establishing cut-off points between levels is always a subjective procedure; some institu-
tions prefer broad levels, others prefer narrow ones. The advantage of a branching
approach is that a common set of levels and/or descriptors can be ‘cut’ into practical local
levels at different points by different users to suit local needs and yet still relate back to
a common system. The numbering allows further subdivisions to be made without losing
the reference to the main objective being referred to. With a ﬂexible branching scheme
such as that proposed, institutions can develop the branches relevant to them to the
appropriate degree of delicacy in order to situate the levels used in their system in terms
of the common framework.
Example 1:
A primary to lower secondary school system, for example, or system for adult
evening classes in which the provision of visible progress at low levels is felt nec-
essary, could develop the Basic User stem to produce a set of perhaps six mile-
stones with ﬁner differentiation at A2 (Waystage) where large numbers of learners
would be found.
A
B
Basic User
Independent User
A1
A2
B1
6
A1.1
A1.2
A2.1
A2.2
1
2
5
A2.1.1 A2.1.2
3
4
Figure 3
32

Common Reference Levels
Example 2:
In an environment for learning the language in the area where it is spoken one
might tend to develop the Independence branch, adding a further layer of delicacy
by subdividing the levels in the middle of the scale:
A
B
C
Basic User
Independent User
Proﬁcient User
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
A2.1
A2.2
B1.1
B1.2
B2.1
B2.2
C1.1
C1.2
1
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 4
Example 3:
Frameworks for encouraging higher level language skills for professional needs
would probably develop the Proﬁcient User branch:
B
C
Independent User
Proﬁcient User
B1
B2
C1
C2
1
2
3
C2.1
C2.2
4
5
Figure 5
3.6
Content coherence in Common Reference Levels
An analysis of the functions, notions, grammar and vocabulary necessary to perform the
communicative tasks described on the scales could be part of the process of developing
new sets of language speciﬁcations.
•
Level A1 (Breakthrough) – is considered the lowest level of generative language use
– the point at which the learner can interact in a simple way, ask and answer simple
questions about themselves, where they live, people they know, and things they have, initiate
and respond to simple statements in areas of immediate need or on very familiar topics,
rather than relying purely on a very ﬁnite rehearsed, lexically organised repertoire
of situation-speciﬁc phrases.
•
Level A2 does appear to reﬂect the level referred to by the Waystage speciﬁcation. It
is at this level that the majority of descriptors stating social functions are to be found,
like use simple everyday polite forms of greeting and address; greet people, ask how they are
and react to news; handle very short social exchanges; ask and answer questions about what
they do at work and in free time; make and respond to invitations; discuss what to do, where to
go and make arrangements to meet; make and accept offers. Here too are to be found
33

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
descriptors on getting out and about: the simpliﬁed cut-down version of the full set
of transactional speciﬁcations in ‘The Threshold Level’ for adults living abroad, like:
make simple transactions in shops, post ofﬁces or banks; get simple information about travel;
use public transport: buses, trains, and taxis, ask for basic information, ask and give directions,
and buy tickets; ask for and provide everyday goods and services.
•
The next band represents a strong Waystage (A2+) performance. What is noticeable
here is more active participation in conversation given some assistance and certain
limitations, for example: initiate, maintain and close simple, restricted face-to-face conversa-
tion; understand enough to manage simple, routine exchanges without undue effort; make
him/herself understood and exchange ideas and information on familiar topics in predictable
everyday situations, provided the other person helps if necessary; communicate successfully on
basic themes if he/she can ask for help to express what he wants to; deal with everyday situa-
tions with predictable content, though he/she will generally have to compromise the message and
search for words; interact with reasonable ease in structured situations, given some help, but
participation in open discussion is fairly restricted; plus signiﬁcantly more ability to
sustain monologues, for example: express how he/she feels in simple terms; give an extended
description of everyday aspects of his/her environment e.g. people, places, a job or study experi-
ence; describe past activities and personal experiences; describe habits and routines; describe
plans and arrangements; explain what he/she likes or dislikes about something; give short, basic
descriptions of events and activities; describe pets and possessions; use simple descriptive lan-
guage to make brief statements about and compare objects and possessions.
•
Level B1 reﬂects the Threshold Level speciﬁcation for a visitor to a foreign country
and is perhaps most categorised by two features. The ﬁrst feature is the ability to
maintain interaction and get across what you want to, in a range of contexts, for
example: generally follow the main points of extended discussion around him/her, provided
speech is clearly articulated in standard dialect; give or seek personal views and opinions in
an informal discussion with friends; express the main point he/she wants to make comprehen-
sibly; exploit a wide range of simple language ﬂexibly to express much of what he or she wants
to; maintain a conversation or discussion but may sometimes be difﬁcult to follow when trying
to say exactly what he/she would like to; keep going comprehensibly, even though pausing for
grammatical and lexical planning and repair is very evident, especially in longer stretches of
free production. The second feature is the ability to cope ﬂexibly with problems in
everyday life, for example cope with less routine situations on public transport; deal with
most situations likely to arise when making travel arrangements through an agent or when
actually travelling; enter unprepared into conversations on familiar topics; make a complaint;
take some initiatives in an interview/consultation (e.g. to bring up a new subject) but is very
dependent on interviewer in the interaction; ask someone to clarify or elaborate what they have
just said.
•
The subsequent band seems to be a Strong Threshold (B1+). The same two main fea-
tures continue to be present, with the addition of a number of descriptors which
focus on the exchange of quantities of information, for example: take messages commu-
nicating enquiries, explaining problems; provide concrete information required in an inter-
view/consultation (e.g. describe symptoms to a doctor) but does so with limited precision; explain
why something is a problem; summarise and give his or her opinion about a short story, article,
talk, discussion, interview, or documentary and answer further questions of detail; carry out a
prepared interview, checking and conﬁrming information, though he/she may occasionally have
to ask for repetition if the other person’s response is rapid or extended; describe how to do some-
34

Common Reference Levels
thing, giving detailed instructions; exchange accumulated factual information on familiar
routine and non-routine matters within his/her ﬁeld with some conﬁdence.
•
Level B2 represents a new level as far above B1 (Threshold) as A2 (Waystage) is below
it. It is intended to reﬂect the Vantage Level speciﬁcation. The metaphor is that,
having been progressing slowly but steadily across the intermediate plateau, the
learner ﬁnds he has arrived somewhere, things look different, he/she acquires a new
perspective, can look around him/her in a new way. This concept does seem to be
borne out to a considerable extent by the descriptors calibrated at this level. They rep-
resent quite a break with the content so far. For example at the lower end of the band
there is a focus on effective argument: account for and sustain his opinions in discussion
by providing relevant explanations, arguments and comments; explain a viewpoint on a topical
issue giving the advantages and disadvantages of various options; construct a chain of reasoned
argument; develop an argument giving reasons in support of or against a particular point of
view; explain a problem and make it clear that his/her counterpart in a negotiation must make
a concession; speculate about causes, consequences, hypothetical situations; take an active part
in informal discussion in familiar contexts, commenting, putting point of view clearly, evaluat-
ing alternative proposals and making and responding to hypotheses. Secondly, running
right through the level there are two new focuses. The ﬁrst is being able to more than
hold your own in social discourse: e.g. converse naturally, ﬂuently and effectively; under-
stand in detail what is said to him/her in the standard spoken language even in a noisy envi-
ronment; initiate discourse, take his/her turn when appropriate and end conversation when
he/she needs to, though he/she may not always do this elegantly; use stock phrases (e.g. ‘That’s a
difﬁcult question to answer’) to gain time and keep the turn whilst formulating what to say;
interact with a degree of ﬂuency and spontaneity that makes regular interaction with native
speakers quite possible without imposing strain on either party; adjust to the changes of direc-
tion, style and emphasis normally found in conversation; sustain relationships with native
speakers without unintentionally amusing or irritating them or requiring them to behave other
than they would with a native speaker. The second new focus is a new degree of language
awareness: correct mistakes if they have led to misunderstandings; make a note of ‘favourite
mistakes’ and consciously monitor speech for it/them; generally correct slips and errors if he/she
becomes conscious of them; plan what is to be said and the means to say it, considering the effect
on the recipient/s. In all, this does seem to be a new threshold for a language learner to
cross.
•
At the next band – representing a Strong Vantage (B2+) performance – the focus on
argument, effective social discourse and on language awareness which appears at B2
(Vantage) continues. However, the focus on argument and social discourse can also
be interpreted as a new focus on discourse skills. This new degree of discourse com-
petence shows itself in conversational management (co-operating strategies): give
feedback on and follow up statements and inferences by other speakers and so help the develop-
ment of the discussion; relate own contribution skilfully to those of other speakers. It is also
apparent in relation to coherence/cohesion: use a limited number of cohesive devices to
link sentences together smoothly into clear, connected discourse; use a variety of linking words
efﬁciently to mark clearly the relationships between ideas; develop an argument systematically
with appropriate highlighting of signiﬁcant points, and relevant supporting detail. Finally, it
is at this band that there is a concentration of items on negotiating: outline a case for
compensation, using persuasive language and simple arguments to demand satisfaction; state
clearly the limits to a concession.
35

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
Level C1, the next band, was labelled Effective Operational Proﬁciency. What seems to
characterise this level is good access to a broad range of language, which allows
ﬂuent, spontaneous communication, as illustrated by the following examples: Can
express him/herself ﬂuently and spontaneously, almost effortlessly. Has a good command of a
broad lexical repertoire allowing gaps to be readily overcome with circumlocutions. There is little
obvious searching for expressions or avoidance strategies; only a conceptually difﬁcult subject
can hinder a natural, smooth ﬂow of language. The discourse skills characterising the pre-
vious band continue to be evident at Level C1, with an emphasis on more ﬂuency, for
example: select a suitable phrase from a ﬂuent repertoire of discourse functions to preface his
remarks in order to get the ﬂoor, or to gain time and keep it whilst thinking; produce clear,
smoothly ﬂowing, well-structured speech, showing controlled use of organisational patterns, con-
nectors and cohesive devices.
•
Level C2, whilst it has been termed ‘Mastery’, is not intended to imply native-speaker
or near native-speaker competence. What is intended is to characterise the degree of
precision, appropriateness and ease with the language which typiﬁes the speech of
those who have been highly successful learners. Descriptors calibrated here include:
convey ﬁner shades of meaning precisely by using, with reasonable accuracy, a wide range of
modiﬁcation devices; has a good command of idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms with
awareness of connotative level of meaning; backtrack and restructure around a difﬁculty so
smoothly the interlocutor is hardly aware of it.
The Common Reference Levels can be presented and exploited in a number of different
formats, in varying degrees of detail. Yet the existence of ﬁxed points of common refer-
ence offers transparency and coherence, a tool for future planning and a basis for further
development. The intention of providing a concrete illustrative set of descriptors,
together with criteria and methodologies for the further development of descriptors, is
to help decision-makers design applications to suit their contexts.
3.7
How to read the scales of illustrative descriptors
The levels used are the six main levels introduced in Chapter 3: A1 (Breakthrough), A2
(Waystage), B1 (Threshold), B2 (Vantage), C1 (Effective Operational Proﬁciency) and C2 (Mastery).
The levels in the middle part of the scale – Waystage, Threshold and Vantage – often have a
subdivision represented by a thin line, as mentioned above. Where this is the case,
descriptors below the thin line represent the criterion level concerned. Descriptors
placed above the line deﬁne a level of proﬁciency which is signiﬁcantly higher than that
represented by the criterion level, but which does not achieve the standard for the fol-
lowing level. The basis for this distinction is the empirical calibration. Where there is no
subdivision of A2 (Waystage), B1 (Threshold) or B2 (Vantage), the descriptor represents the
criterion level. In those cases no formulation was found to fall between the two criterion
levels concerned.
Some people prefer to read a scale of descriptors from the lowest to the highest levels;
some prefer the reverse. For consistency all scales are presented with C2 (Mastery) at the
top, and A1 (Breakthrough) at the bottom.
Each level should be taken to subsume the levels below it on the scale. That is to say,
someone at B1 (Threshold) is considered also to be able to do whatever is stated at A2
36

Common Reference Levels
(Waystage), to be better than what is stated at A2 (Waystage). That means that provisos
attached to a performance placed at A2 (Waystage) for example ‘provided speech is clearly
and slowly articulated’ will have less force, or be non-applicable to a performance at B1
(Threshold).
Not every element or aspect in a descriptor is repeated at the following level. That is to
say that entries at each level describe selectively what is seen as salient or new at that
level. They do not systematically repeat all the elements mentioned at the level below
with a minor change of formulation to indicate increased difﬁculty.
Not every level is described on all scales. It is difﬁcult to draw conclusions from the
absence of a particular area at a particular level, since this could be due to one of several
different reasons, or to a combination of them:
•
The area exists at this level: some descriptors were included in the research project,
but were dropped in quality control;
•
The area probably exists at this level: descriptors could presumably be written, but
haven’t been;
•
The area may exist at this level: but formulation seems to be very difﬁcult if not
impossible;
•
The area doesn’t exist or isn’t relevant at this level; a distinction cannot be made here.
If users of the Framework wish to exploit the descriptor bank they will need to take a
view on the question of what to do about gaps in the descriptors provided. It may well be
the case that gaps can be plugged by further elaboration in the context concerned,
and/or by merging material from the user’s own system. On the other hand some gaps
may still – rightly – remain. It might be the case that a particular category is not relevant
towards the top or bottom of the set of levels. A gap in the middle of a scale may, on the
other hand, indicate that a meaningful distinction cannot easily be formulated.
3.8
How to use scales of descriptors of language proﬁciency
The Common Reference Levels exempliﬁed in Tables 1, 2 and 3 constitute a verbal scale
of proﬁciency. Technical issues concerned with the development of such a scale are dis-
cussed in Appendix A. Chapter 9 on assessment describes ways in which the scale of
Common Reference Levels can be used as a resource in relation to the assessment of lan-
guage proﬁciency.
However, a very important issue in discussing scales of language proﬁciency is the
accurate identiﬁcation of the purpose the scale is to serve, and an appropriate matching
of the formulation of scale descriptors to that purpose.
A functional distinction has been made between three types of scales of proﬁciency:
(a) user-oriented, (b) assessor-oriented and (c) constructor-oriented scales (Alderson 1991).
Problems can arise when a scale designed for one function is used for another – unless
the formulation can be shown to be adequate.
(a)
user-oriented scales report typical or likely behaviours of learners at any given level.
Statements tend to talk about what the learner can do and to be positively worded, even at
low levels:
37

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Can understand simple English spoken slowly and carefully to him/her and catch
the main points in short, clear, simple messages and announcements.
Eurocentres Certiﬁcate Scale of Language Proﬁciency 1993: Listening: Level 22
though limitations may also be expressed:
Manages to communicate in simple and routine tasks and situations. With the
help of a dictionary can understand simple written messages and without one
can get the gist. Limited language proﬁciency causes frequent breakdowns and
misunderstandings in non-routine situations.
Finnish Nine Level Scale of Language Proﬁciency 1993: Level 2
User-oriented scales are often holistic, offering one descriptor per level. The Finnish scale
referred to is of this type. Table 1, shown earlier in this chapter in order to introduce the
Common Reference Levels, also offers users a holistic summary of typical proﬁciency at
each level. User scales may also report the four skills, as in the Eurocentres scale referred
to above, but simplicity is a major characteristic of scales with this purpose.
(b)
assessor-oriented scales guide the rating process. Statements are typically expressed in
terms of aspects of the quality of the performance expected. Here assessment in the sense
of summative, proﬁciency assessment of a particular performance is meant. Such scales
concentrate on how well the learner performs and are often negatively worded even at high
levels, particularly when the formulation is norm-referenced around a pass grade for an
examination:
Disconnected speech and/or frequent hesitations impeded communication and
constantly strain the listener.
Certiﬁcate in Advanced English 1991 (University of Cambridge Local Examinations
Syndicate), Paper 5 (Oral) Criteria for Assessment: Fluency: Band 1–2 (bottom of 4 bands)
Negative formulation can, however, be to a great extent avoided if a qualitative develop-
ment approach is used in which informants analyse and describe features of key perfor-
mance samples.
Some assessor-oriented scales are holistic scales, offering one descriptor per level. Others
on the other hand are analytic scales, focusing on different aspects of the performance
such as Range, Accuracy, Fluency, Pronunciation. Table 3, presented earlier in this
chapter, is an example of a positively worded analytic assessor-oriented scale drawn from
the CEF illustrative descriptors.
Some analytic scales have a large number of categories in order to proﬁle achievement.
Such approaches have been argued to be less appropriate for assessment because asses-
sors tend to ﬁnd it difﬁcult to cope with more than 3–5 categories. Analytic scales like
Table 3 have been therefore described as diagnosis-oriented since one of their purposes is
to proﬁle current position, proﬁle target needs in relevant categories and provide a diag-
nosis of what needs to be covered to get there.
2 All the scales mentioned in this chapter are reviewed in detail with full references in North, B. (1994) Scales of lan-
guage proﬁciency: a survey of some existing systems, Strasbourg, Council of Europe CC-LANG (94) 24.
38

Common Reference Levels
(c)
constructor-oriented scales guide the construction of tests at appropriate levels.
Statements are typically expressed in terms of speciﬁc communication tasks the learner
might be asked to perform in tests. These types of scales, or lists of speciﬁcations, also
concentrate on what the learner can do.
Can give detailed information about own family, living conditions, educational
background; can describe and converse on everyday things in his environment
(e.g., his suburb, the weather); can describe present or most recent job or activ-
ity; can communicate on the spot with fellow workers or immediate superior
(e.g., ask questions about job, make complaints about work conditions, time off,
etc.); can give simple messages over the telephone; can give directions and
instructions for simple tasks in his everyday life (e.g., to tradesmen). Has tenta-
tive use of polite request forms (e.g., involving could, would). May sometimes
offend by unintended blandness or aggressiveness or irritate by over-deference
where native speakers expect informality.
Australian Second Language Proﬁciency Ratings 1982; Speaking; Level 2: Examples of
Speciﬁc ESL tasks (one of three columns)
This holistic descriptor could be deconstructed into short, constituent descriptors for the
categories Information Exchange (Personal Domain; Work Domain), Description, Conversation,
Telephoning, Directing/Instructing, Sociocultural.
Finally, checklists or scales of descriptors used for continuous teacher-assessment – or
self-assessment – work best when the descriptors say not only what the learners can do but
also how well they can do it. The failure to include adequate information on how well learn-
ers should perform tasks caused problems with earlier versions of both the English
National Curriculum attainment targets and the Australian curriculum proﬁles. Teachers
appear to prefer some detail, related to curriculum tasks (a link to constructor-orientation)
on the one hand, and related to qualitative criteria (a link to diagnosis-oriented) on the
other hand. Descriptors for self-assessment will also typically be more effective if they
indicate how well one should be able to perform tasks at different levels.
To summarise, scales of language proﬁciency can thus be seen as having one or more
of the following orientations:
user-oriented
(simpler)
WHAT the learner can do
constructor-oriented
(more complex)
teacher-oriented
learner-oriented
diagnostic-oriented
(more complex)
HOW WELL he/she performs
assessor-oriented
(simpler)
Figure 6
All these orientations can be considered relevant to a common framework.
39

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Another way of looking at the orientations discussed above is to say that a user-
oriented scale is a less detailed version of a constructor-oriented scale which is intended
to give an overview. Similarly, an assessor-oriented scale is a less detailed version of a
diagnostic-oriented scale which helps an assessor to arrive at an overview. Some user-
oriented scales take this process of reducing detail into an overview to its logical conclu-
sion and present a ‘global’ scale describing typical achievement at each level. In some
cases this is instead of reporting detail (e.g. the Finnish scale cited above). In some cases
it is to give meaning to a proﬁle of numbers reported for particular skills (e.g. IELTS:
International English Language Testing System). In other cases it is to give an entry point
or overview to a more detailed speciﬁcation (e.g. Eurocentres). In all these cases, the view
taken is similar to that in hypertext computer presentations. The user is presented with
an information pyramid and can get an overview by considering the top layer of the hier-
archy (here the ‘global’ scale). More detail can be presented by going down layers of the
system, but at any one point, what is being looked at is conﬁned to one or two screens –
or pieces of paper. In this way complexity can be presented without blinding people with
irrelevant detail, or simplifying to the point of banality. Detail is there – if it is required.
Hypertext is a very useful analogy in thinking of a descriptive system. It is the approach
taken in the ESU (English-speaking Union) Framework scale for examinations in English
as a Foreign Language. In the scales presented in Chapters 4 and 5 the approach is devel-
oped further. For example, in relation to communicative activities, a scale for Interaction
is a summary of sub-scales in this category.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
to what extent their interest in levels relates to learning objectives, syllabus content,
teacher guidelines and continuous assessment tasks (constructor-oriented);
•
to what extent their interest in levels relates to increasing consistency of assessment by
providing deﬁned criteria for degree of skill (assessor-oriented);
•
to what extent their interest in levels relates to reporting results to employers, other
educational sectors, parents and learners themselves (user-oriented), providing deﬁned
criteria for degrees of skill (assessor-oriented);
•
to what extent their interest in levels relates to reporting results to employers, other
educational sectors, parents and learners themselves (user-oriented).
3.9
Proﬁciency levels and achievement grades
An important distinction in relation to scaling can be made between the deﬁnition of
levels of proﬁciency, as in a scale of Common Reference Levels, and the assessment of
degrees of achievement in relation to an objective at one particular level. A proﬁciency
scale, like the Common Reference Levels, deﬁnes a series of ascending bands of proﬁ-
ciency. It may cover the whole conceptual range of learner proﬁciency, or it may just
cover the range of proﬁciency relevant to the sector or institution concerned. Being
assessed as Level B2 may represent a tremendous achievement for one learner (assessed
as Level B1 only two months previously), but a mediocre performance for another
(already assessed as Level B2 two years previously).
40

Common Reference Levels
Proﬁciency
Scale
9
8
7
Exam ‘Y’ Grades
6
5
(DISTINCTION)
5
Examination
4
(CREDIT)
‘Y’
4
3
(PASS)
2
(FAIL)
3
1
2
1
Figure 7
A particular objective may be situated at a certain level. In Figure 7, examination ‘Y’
aims to cover the band of proﬁciency represented by Levels 4 and 5 on the proﬁciency
scale. There may be other examinations aimed at different levels, and the proﬁciency
scale may be used to help make transparent the relationship between them. This is the
idea behind the English-speaking Union (ESU) Framework project for examinations in
English as a Foreign Language, and of the ALTE scheme to relate examinations for differ-
ent European languages to each other.
Achievement in examination ‘Y’ may be assessed in terms of a grading scale, let us say
1–5, in which a ‘3’ is the norm representing a Pass. Such a grading scale may be used for
direct assessment of performance in subjectively marked papers – typically for Speaking
and for Writing – and/or may be used to report the examination result. Examination ‘Y’
may be part of a suite of examinations ‘X’, ‘Y’ and ‘Z’. Each examination may well have a
grading scale in a similar style. But it is obvious that a Grade 4 in Examination X does not
mean the same thing as a Grade 4 in Examination Y in terms of proﬁciency in the language.
If Examinations ‘X’, ‘Y’, and ‘Z’ have all been situated onto a common proﬁciency scale,
then it should be possible, over a period of time, to establish the relationship between
the grades on one examination in the series with the grades on the others. This can be
achieved through a process of pooling expertise, analysing speciﬁcations, comparing
ofﬁcial samples and scaling candidates’ results.
41

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
It is possible to establish the relationship between examination grades and proﬁciency
levels in this way because examinations have, by deﬁnition, a standard and a group of
trained assessors capable of interpreting that standard. It is necessary to make the
common standards explicit and transparent, provide examples which operationalise the
standards, and then scale them.
Assessment of achievement in schools in many countries is through achievement
grades (notes, Noten), sometimes 1–6, with 4 as the Pass, norm or ‘satisfactory’ grade. What
is meant by the various grades is internalised by the teachers in the context concerned,
but rarely deﬁned. The nature of the relationship between teacher assessment grades
and proﬁciency levels is in principle the same as that between examination grades and
proﬁciency levels. But the issue is further complicated by the fact that there will be a
myriad of standards involved. This is because, apart from the question of the form of
assessment used and degree of common interpretation of grades by teachers in any one
context, each school year in each type of school in each educationally distinct region will
naturally constitute a different standard. A ‘4’ at the end of the fourth year obviously
does not mean the same as a ‘4’ at the end of the third year in the same secondary school.
Nor will a ‘4’ for the end of the fourth year mean the same thing in two different kinds
of school.
Nevertheless, it is possible to establish an approximate relationship between the range
of standards in use in a particular sector and proﬁciency levels. This can be achieved
through a cumulative process employing such techniques as the following. Standard deﬁ-
nitions can be provided for different grades of achievement of the same objective.
Teachers can be asked to proﬁle average achievement onto an existing proﬁciency scale
or grid such as Table 1 and Table 2. Representative samples of performance can be col-
lected and calibrated to a scale in joint rating sessions. Teachers can be asked to rate pre-
viously standardised videos with the grades they normally give their students.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
to what extent their concern relates to the establishment of a set of proﬁling levels to
record progress in proﬁciency within their system as a whole
•
to what extent their concern relates to the provision of transparent criteria for the award
of grades of achievement in the objectives set for a particular proﬁciency level, perhaps
operationalised by an examination, perhaps assessed by teachers
•
to what extent their concern relates to the development of a common framework to
establish coherent relationships between a range of educational sectors, proﬁciency levels,
and assessment types within their system.
42

4
Language use and the language user/learner
Following the ﬁrst three introductory and explanatory chapters, Chapters 4 and 5 now
present a fairly detailed scheme of categories for the description of language use and the
language user. In accordance with the action-oriented approach taken, it is assumed that
the language learner is in the process of becoming a language user, so that the same set
of categories will apply. There is, however, an important modiﬁcation which must be
made. The learner of a second or foreign language and culture does not cease to be com-
petent in his or her mother tongue and the associated culture. Nor is the new compe-
tence kept entirely separate from the old. The learner does not simply acquire two
distinct, unrelated ways of acting and communicating. The language learner becomes
plurilingual and develops interculturality. The linguistic and cultural competences in
respect of each language are modiﬁed by knowledge of the other and contribute to inter-
cultural awareness, skills and know-how. They enable the individual to develop an
enriched, more complex personality and an enhanced capacity for further language
learning and greater openness to new cultural experiences. Learners are also enabled to
mediate, through interpretation and translation, between speakers of the two languages
concerned who cannot communicate directly. A place is of course given to these activ-
ities (section 4.4.4) and competences (sections 5.1.1.3, 5.1.2.2 and 5.1.4), which differen-
tiate the language learner from the monolingual native speaker.
Question boxes. Readers will see that from this point on, each section is followed by a
box in which the Framework user is invited: ‘to consider and where appropriate state’ the
answers to one or more questions that follow. The alternatives in the phrase ‘need/be
equipped/be required’ relate to learning, teaching and assessment respectively. The
content of the box is phrased as an invitation rather than as an instruction in order to
emphasise the non-directive character of the Framework enterprise. If a user decides that
a whole area is not of concern, there is no need to consider each section within that area
in detail. In most cases, however, we expect that the Framework user will reﬂect on the
question posed in each box and take a decision one way or another. If the decision taken
is of signiﬁcance, it can be formulated using the categories and examples supplied, sup-
plemented as may be found necessary for the purpose in hand.
The analysis of language use and the language user contained in Chapter 4 is funda-
mental to the use of the Framework, since it offers a structure of parameters and categor-
ies which should enable all those involved in language learning, teaching and assessment
to consider and state in concrete terms and in whatever degree of detail they wish, what
they expect the learners towards whom they undertake responsibilities to be able to do
with a language, and what they should know in order to be able to act. Its aim is to be
comprehensive in its coverage, but not of course exhaustive. Course designers, textbook
43

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
writers, teachers and examiners will have to make very detailed concrete decisions on
the content of texts, exercises, activities, tests, etc. This process can never be reduced
simply to choosing from a pre-determined menu. That level of decision must, and should,
be in the hands of the practitioners concerned, calling on their judgement and creativ-
ity. They should, however, ﬁnd represented here all the major aspects of language use and
competence they need to take into consideration. The overall structure of Chapter 4 is
thus a kind of checklist and for this reason is presented at the beginning of the chapter.
Users are recommended to familiarise themselves with this overall structure and to refer
to it when asking themselves such questions as:
•
Can I predict the domains in which my learners will operate and the situations which
they will have to deal with? If so, what roles will they have to play?
•
What sort of people will they have to deal with?
•
What will be their personal or professional relations in what institutional frameworks?
•
What objects will they need to refer to?
•
What tasks will they have to accomplish?
•
What themes will they need to handle?
•
Will they have to speak, or simply listen and read with understanding?
•
What sort of things will they be listening to or reading?
•
Under what conditions will they have to act?
•
What knowledge of the world or of another culture will they need to call on?
•
What skills will they need to have developed? How can they still be themselves
without being misinterpreted?
•
For how much of this can I take responsibility?
•
If I cannot predict the situations in which the learners will use the language, how can
I best prepare them to use the language for communication without over-training
them for situations that may never arise?
•
What can I give them that will be of lasting value, in whatever different ways their
careers may later diverge?
•
How can language learning best contribute to their personal and cultural develop-
ment as responsible citizens in a pluralist democratic society?
Clearly, the Framework cannot give the answers to these questions. Indeed, it is precisely
because the answers depend entirely upon a full appreciation of the learning/teaching
situation and above all upon the needs, motivations, characteristics and resources of the
learners and other parties concerned that the diversiﬁcation of provision is necessary.
The role of the following chapters is to articulate the problem in such a way that the
issues can be considered and if need be debated in a transparent and rational way and
the decisions communicated to all those affected in a clear and concrete manner.
Where possible, reference is made at the end of each section to relevant items in the
General Bibliography for further reading.
4.1
The context of language use
It has long been recognised that language in use varies greatly according to the require-
ments of the context in which it is used. In this respect, language is not a neutral instru-
44

Language use and the language user/learner
ment of thought like, say, mathematics. The need and the desire to communicate arise
in a particular situation and the form as well as the content of the communication is a
response to that situation. The ﬁrst section of Chapter 4 is therefore devoted to different
aspects of context.
4.1.1
Domains
Each act of language use is set in the context of a particular situation within one of the
domains (spheres of action or areas of concern) in which social life is organised. The choice
of the domains in which learners are being prepared to operate has far-reaching impli-
cations for the selection of situations, purposes, tasks, themes and texts for teaching and
testing materials and activities. Users may have to bear in mind the motivational effects
of choosing domains of present relevance in relation to their future utility. For instance,
children may be better motivated by a concentration on their present centres of interest,
which may then leave them ill-prepared to communicate later in an adult environment.
In adult education, conﬂicts of interest can arise between employers, who may be
funding courses and who look for concentration on the occupational domain, and stu-
dents who may be mostly interested in developing personal relations.
The number of possible domains is indeterminate, since any deﬁnable sphere of activ-
ity or area of concern may constitute the domain of concern to a particular user or course
of instruction. For general purposes of language learning and teaching it may be useful
to distinguish at least the following:
•
the personal domain, in which the person concerned lives as a private individual,
centred on home life with family and friends, and engages in individual practices
such as reading for pleasure, keeping a personal diary, pursuing a special interest or
hobby, etc.;
•
the public domain, in which the person concerned acts as a member of the general
public, or of some organisation, and is engaged in transactions of various kinds for a
variety of purposes;
•
the occupational domain, in which the person concerned is engaged in his or her job
or profession;
•
the educational domain, in which the person concerned is engaged in organised learn-
ing, especially (but not necessarily) within an educational institution.
It should be noted that in many situations more than one domain may be involved. For
a teacher, the occupational and educational domains largely coincide. The public
domain, with that which is involved in terms of social and administrative interactions
and transactions, and contact with the media, opens up to the other domains. In both
the educational and professional domains, many interactions and language activities
fall under the ordinary social functioning of a group rather than reﬂect a connection
with occupational or learning tasks; similarly, the personal domain should by no means
be considered as a sphere apart (media penetration into family and personal life, distri-
bution of various ‘public’ documents in ‘private’ letter-boxes, advertising, public texts on
the packaging of products used in private daily life, etc.).
On the other hand, the personal domain individualises or personalises actions in the
45

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
other domains. Without ceasing to be social agents, the persons involved situate them-
selves as individuals; a technical report, a class presentation, a purchase made can – for-
tunately – enable a ‘personality’ to be expressed other than solely in relation to the
professional, educational or public domain of which, in a speciﬁc time and place, its lan-
guage activity forms part.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
in which domains the learner will need/be equipped/be required to operate.
4.1.2
Situations
In each domain, the external situations which arise may be described in terms of:
•
the locations in which, and the times at which, they occur;
•
the institutions or organisations – the structure and procedures of which control much
of what can normally occur;
•
the persons involved, especially in their relevant social roles in relation to the user/
learner;
•
the objects (animate and inanimate) in the environment;
•
the events that take place;
•
the operations performed by the persons involved;
•
the texts encountered within the situation.
Table 5 (on pages 48–49) gives some examples of the above situational categories, clas-
siﬁed according to domains, likely to be met in most European countries. The table is
purely illustrative and suggestive. It makes no claim to be exhaustive. In particular it
cannot deal with the dynamic aspects of interactive situations, in which the participants
identify the relevant features of the situation as it develops and are concerned to change
rather than to describe it. More is said regarding the relations between partners in acts
of communication in sections 4.1.4 and 4.1.5. On the internal structure of communica-
tive interaction, see 5.2.3.2. On sociocultural aspects, see 5.1.1.2, for user strategies, 4.4.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
the situations which the learner will need/be equipped/be required to handle;
•
the locations, institutions/organisations, persons, objects, events and actions with which
the learner will be concerned.
4.1.3
Conditions and constraints
The external conditions under which communication occurs impose various constraints
on the user/learner and his/her interlocutors, e.g.:
46

Language use and the language user/learner
•
Physical conditions:
•
a)
for speech:
•
clarity of pronunciation;
•
ambient noise (trains, aircraft, ‘static’, etc.);
•
interference (crowded street, markets, pubs, parties, discos, etc.);
•
distortions (poor telephone lines, radio reception, public address systems);
•
weather conditions (wind, extreme cold, etc.).
•
b)
for writing:
•
poor reproduction of print;
•
difﬁcult handwriting;
•
poor lighting, etc.
•
Social conditions:
•
•
number and familiarity of interlocutors;
•
•
relative status of participants (power and solidarity, etc.);
•
•
presence/absence of audience or eavesdroppers;
•
•
social relationships between participants (e.g. friendliness/hostility, co-opera-
tiveness).
•
Time pressures:
•
•
different pressures for speaker/listener (real time) and writer/reader (more
ﬂexible);
•
•
preparation time (e.g. improvised vs routinised vs prepared in advance) for
speeches, reports, etc.;
•
•
limitations on time allowed (e.g. by rules, expense, competing events and com-
mitments, etc.) for turns and interactions;
•
•
other pressures: ﬁnancial; anxiety-producing situations (e.g. examinations),
etc.
The ability of all speakers, especially learners, to put their language competence into
action depends greatly on the physical conditions under which communication takes
place. Speech recognition is made much more difﬁcult by noise, interference and dis-
tortion, examples of which are given. The ability to function efﬁciently and reliably
under difﬁcult conditions may be of crucial importance, say for airline pilots receiving
landing instructions, where there is no margin of error. Those learning to make public
announcements in foreign languages need to use a particularly clear pronunciation, to
repeat key words, etc., to ensure understanding. Language laboratories have often
employed tapes copied from copies in which noise and distortion are at levels which
would be rejected as unacceptable in a visual channel and seriously impede language
learning.
Care has to be taken to ensure that all candidates in listening comprehension tests enjoy
equal conditions. Similar considerations may apply, mutatis mutandis, to reading compre-
hension and written production. Teachers and testers need also to be aware of the effect
of social conditions and time pressures upon the processes of learning, classroom inter-
action and their effect upon a learner’s competence and his or her ability to perform on
a particular occasion.
47

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Table 5. External context of use: descriptive categories
Domain
Locations
Institutions
Persons
Personal
Home: house, rooms, garden
The family
(Grand)Parents, offspring,
own
Social networks
siblings, aunts, uncles,
of family
cousins, in-laws, spouses,
of friends
intimates, friends,
of strangers
acquaintances
Own space in hostel, hotel
The countryside, seaside
Public
Public spaces:
Public authorities
Members of the public
street, square, park
Political bodies
Ofﬁcials
Public transport
The law
Shop personnel
Shops (super)markets
Public health
Police, army, security
Hospitals, surgeries, clinics
Services clubs
Drivers, conductors
Sports stadia, ﬁelds, halls
Societies
Passengers
Theatre, cinema, entertainment
Political parties
Players, fans, spectators
Restaurant, pub, hotel
Denominations
Actors, audiences
Places of worship
Waiters, barpersons
Receptionists
Priests, congregation
Occupational
Ofﬁces
Firms
Employers/ees
Factories
Multinational
Managers
Workshops
corporations
Colleagues
Ports, railways
Nationalised
Subordinates
Farms
industries
Workmates
Airports
Trade unions
Clients
Stores, shops
Customers
Service industries
Receptionists, secretaries
Hotels
Cleaners
Civil Service
Educational
Schools: hall
School
Class teachers
classrooms, playground,
College
Teaching staff
Sports ﬁelds, corridors
University
Caretakers
Colleges
Learned societies
Assistant staff
Universities
Professional
Parents
Lecture theatres
Institutions
Classmates
Seminar rooms
Adult education
Professors, lecturers
Student Union
bodies
(Fellow) students
Halls of residence
Library and laboratory staff
Laboratories
Refectory staff, cleaners
Canteen
Porters, secretaries
48

Language use and the language user/learner
Objects
Events
Operations
Texts
Furnishing and furniture
Family occasions
Living routines:
Teletext
Clothing
Encounters
dressing, undressing
Guarantees
Household equipment
Incidents, accidents
cooking, eating,
Recipes
Toys, tools, personal hygiene
Natural phenomena
washing
Instructional material
Objets d’art, books,
Parties, visits
DIY, gardening
Novels, magazines
Wild/domestic animals, pets
Walking, cycling
Reading, radio and TV
Newspapers
Trees, plants, lawn, ponds
motoring
Entertaining
Junk mail
Household goods
Holidays, excursions
Hobbies
Brochures
Handbags
Sports events
Games and sports
Personal letters
Leisure/sports equipment
Broadcast and recorded
spoken texts
Money, purse, wallet
Incidents
Buying and obtaining
Public announcements
Forms
Accidents, illnesses
public services
and notices
Goods
Public meetings
Using medical services
Labels and packaging
Weapons
Law-suits, court trials
Journeys by road/
Leaﬂets, grafﬁti
Rucksacks
Rag-days, ﬁnes, arrests
rails/ship/air
Tickets, timetables
Cases, grips
Matches, contests
Public entertainment
Notices, regulations
Balls
Performances
and leisure activities
Programmes
Programmes
Weddings, funerals
Religious services
Contracts
Meals, drinks, snacks
Menus
Passports, licences
Sacred texts,
sermons, hymns
Business machinery
Meetings
Business admin.
Business letter
Industrial machinery
Interviews
Industrial management Report memorandum
Industrial and craft tools
Receptions
Production operations
Life and safety notices
Conferences
Ofﬁce procedures
Instructional manuals
Trade fairs
Trucking
Regulations
Consultations
Sales operations
Advertising material
Seasonal sales
Selling, marketing
Labelling and
Industrial accidents
Computer operation
packaging
Industrial disputes
Ofﬁce maintenance
Job description
Sign posting
Visiting cards
Writing material
Return to school / entry
Assembly
Authentic texts (as
School uniforms
Breaking up
Lessons
above)
Games equipment
Visits and exchanges
Games
Textbooks, readers
and clothing
Parents’ days / evenings
Playtime
Reference books
Food
Sports days, matches
Clubs and societies
Blackboard text
Audio-visual equipment
Disciplinary problems
Lectures, essay writing
OP text
Blackboard & chalk
Laboratory work
Computer screen text
Computers
Library work
Videotext
Briefcases and school bags
Seminars and tutorials
Exercise materials
Homework
Journal articles
Debates and
Abstracts
discussions
Dictionaries
49

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
how the physical conditions under which the learner will have to communicate will affect
what he/she is required to do;
•
how the number and nature of the interlocutors will affect what the learner is required to
do;
•
under what time pressure the learner will have to operate.
4.1.4
The user/learner’s mental context
The external context is highly organised independently of the individual. This organisa-
tion is extremely rich. It provides a very ﬁne articulation of the world, closely reﬂected in
the language of the community concerned and acquired by its speakers in the course of
their maturation, education and experience, at least in so far as it is seen to be relevant
to them. As a factor in the participation of a communicative event, however, we must dis-
tinguish between this external context, which is far too rich to be acted upon or even per-
ceived in its full complexity by any individual, and the user/learner’s mental context.
The external context is ﬁltered and interpreted through the user’s:
perceptual apparatus;
attention mechanisms;
long-term experience, affecting memory, associations and connotations;
practical classiﬁcation of objects, events, etc.;
linguistic categorisation.
These factors inﬂuence the user’s observation of the context. The extent to which the
observed context provides the mental context for the communicative event is further
determined by considerations of relevance in the light of the user’s
intentions in entering into communication;
line of thought: the stream of thoughts, ideas, feelings, sense, impressions, etc., attended
to in consciousness;
expectations in the light of previous experience;
reﬂection: the operation of thought processes upon experience (e.g. deduction, induction);
needs, drives, motivations, interests, which lead to a decision to act;
conditions and constraints, limiting and controlling the choices of action;
state of mind (fatigue, excitement, etc.), health and personal qualities (see section 5.1.3).
The mental context is thus not limited to reducing the information content of the imme-
diately observable external context. Line of thought may be more powerfully inﬂuenced
by memory, stored knowledge, imagination and other internal cognitive (and emotive)
processes. In that case the language produced is only marginally related to the observ-
able external context. Consider, for example, an examinee in a featureless hall, or a math-
ematician or poet in his or her study.
External conditions and constraints are also relevant mainly in so far as the user/learner
50

Language use and the language user/learner
recognises, accepts and adjusts to them (or fails to do so). This is very much a matter of the
individual’s interpretation of the situation in the light of his or her general competences
(see section 5.1) such as prior knowledge, values and beliefs.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what assumptions are made about the learner’s ability to observe and identify relevant
features of the external contexts of communication;
•
how communicative and learning activities relate to the learner’s drives, motivations and
interests;
•
how far the learner is required to reﬂect on experience;
•
in what ways the mental characteristics of the learner condition and constrain
communication.
4.1.5
The mental context of the interlocutor(s)
In a communicative event we have also to consider the user’s interlocutor. The need for
communication presupposes a ‘communication gap’, which can however be bridged
because of the overlap, or partial congruence, between the mental context of the user in
focus and the mental context of the interlocutor(s).
In face-to-face interaction, user and interlocutor(s) share the same external context
(except, crucially, for the presence of the other), but for the reasons given above their
observation and interpretation of the context differ. The effect – and often all or part of
the function – of a communicative act is to increase the area of congruence in the under-
standing of the situation in the interest of effective communication so as to serve the
purposes of the participants. This may be a matter of an exchange of factual information.
More difﬁcult to bridge are differences in values and beliefs, politeness conventions,
social expectations, etc., in terms of which the parties interpret the interaction, unless
they have acquired the relevant intercultural awareness.
The interlocutor(s) may be subject to partially or wholly different conditions and con-
straints from the user/learner, and react to them in different ways. For instance, an
employee using a public address system may be unaware how poor its output is. One
partner to a telephone conversation may have time to kill whilst the other has a client
waiting, etc. These differences greatly affect the pressures upon the user.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
to what extent the learners will need to adjust to the interlocutor’s mental context;
•
how learners can best be prepared to make the necessary adjustments.
4.2
Communication themes
Within the various domains we may distinguish themes, the topics which are the sub-
jects of discourse, conversation, reﬂection or composition, as the focus of attention in
51

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
particular communicative acts. Thematic categories can be classiﬁed in many different
ways. One inﬂuential classiﬁcation, into themes, sub-themes and ‘speciﬁc notions’ is
that presented in Threshold Level 1990, Chapter 7:
1.
personal identiﬁcation
2.
house and home, environment
3.
daily life
4.
free time, entertainment
5.
travel
6.
relations with other people
7.
health and body care
8.
education
9.
shopping
10.
food and drink
11.
services
12.
places
13.
language
14.
weather
In each of these thematic areas, subcategories are established. For example, area 4, ‘free
time and entertainment’, is subcategorised in the following way:
4.1
leisure
4.2
hobbies and interests
4.3
radio and TV
4.4
cinema, theatre, concert, etc.
4.5
exhibitions, museums, etc.
4.6
intellectual and artistic pursuits
4.7
sports
4.8
press
For each sub-theme, ‘speciﬁc notions’ are identiﬁed. In this respect, the categories repre-
sented in Table 5, covering the locations, institutions etc. to be treated, are particularly
relevant. For instance, under 4.7. ‘sports’, Threshold Level 1990 speciﬁes:
1.
locations: ﬁeld, ground, stadium
2.
institutions and organisations: sport, team, club
3.
persons: player
4.
objects: cards, ball
5.
events: race, game
6.
actions: to watch, to play (+name of sport), to race, to win, to lose, to draw
Clearly, this particular selection and organisation of themes, sub-themes and speciﬁc
notions is not deﬁnitive. It results from the authors’ decisions in the light of their assess-
ment of the communicative needs of the learners concerned. It will be seen that the
above themes relate mostly to the personal and public domains, as is appropriate to tem-
porary visitors who are unlikely to enter into the vocational and educational life of the
52

Language use and the language user/learner
country. Some (e.g. area 4) are partly in the personal and partly in the public domain.
Users of the Framework, including where possible the actual learners concerned, will of
course make their own decisions based on their assessment of learner needs, motiva-
tions, characteristics and resources in the relevant domain or domains with which they
are concerned For example, vocationally-oriented language learning (VOLL) may develop
themes in the occupational area relevant to the students concerned. Students in upper
secondary education may explore scientiﬁc, technological, economic, etc. themes in
some depth. The use of a foreign language as medium of instruction will necessarily
entail a close concern with the thematic content of the subject area taught.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
which themes learners will need/be equipped/be required to handle in the selected
domains;
•
which sub-themes they will handle with respect to each theme;
•
which speciﬁc notions relating to locations, institutions/organisations, persons, objects,
events and operations they will need/be equipped/be required to handle in order to deal
with each (sub)theme.
4.3
Communicative tasks and purposes
4.3.1
Acts of communication with one or more interlocutors are generally undertaken
by a language user in pursuance of his or her needs in a given situation. In the personal
domain, the intention may be to entertain a visitor by exchanging information on fa-
milies, friends, likes and dislikes, to compare experiences and attitudes, etc. In the public
domain, it will usually be to transact business, say to buy clothes of good quality at a rea-
sonable price. In the occupational domain, it may be to understand new regulations and
their implications for a client. In the educational domain it may be to contribute to a
roleplay or a seminar, or write a paper on a specialised topic for a conference or for pub-
lication, etc.
4.3.2
Over the years, needs analyses and language audits have produced an extensive
literature on the language-using tasks a learner may be equipped or required to tackle
in order to deal with the exigencies of the situations which arise in the various domains.
As examples among many others, the following tasks in the vocational domain from
Threshold Level 1990 (Chapter 2, section 1.12) may be helpful.
Communicating at work:
As temporary residents learners should be able to:
•
seek work permits etc. as required;
•
enquire (e.g. from employment agencies) about the nature, availability and
conditions of employment (e.g. job description, pay, laws of work, free time
and holidays, length of notice);
53

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
read employment advertisements;
•
write letters of application and attend interviews giving written or spoken
information about own personal data, qualiﬁcations and experience and
answer questions about them;
•
understand and follow joining procedures;
•
understand and ask questions concerning the tasks to be performed on start-
ing work;
•
understand safety and security regulations and instructions;
•
report an accident and make an insurance claim;
•
make use of welfare facilities;
•
communicate appropriately with superiors, colleagues and subordinates;
•
participate in the social life of the enterprise or institution (e.g. canteen,
sports and social clubs, etc.).
As a member of the host community, a learner should be able to assist an English-speaking
(native or non-native) person with the tasks listed above.
Threshold Level 1990, Chapter 7, Section 1 gives examples of tasks in the personal domain.
Personal identiﬁcation
The learners can say who they are, spell their name, state their address, give their
telephone number, say when and where they were born, state their age, sex, state
whether they are married or not, state their nationality, say where they are from,
what they do for a living, describe their family, state their religion, if any, state
their likes and dislikes, say what other people are like; elicit/understand similar
information from others.
Practitioners (teachers, course-writers, examiners, curriculum designers, etc.) and users
(parents, school governors, employers, etc.) as well as learners themselves have found
these highly concrete task speciﬁcations very meaningful and motivating as learning
objectives. Tasks are, however, indeﬁnitely large in number. It is not possible for a
general framework to specify in extenso all the communicative tasks that may be
required in real-life situations. It is for practitioners to reﬂect upon the communicative
needs of the learners with whom they are concerned and then, using as appropriate the
full resources of the Framework model (e.g. as detailed in Chapter 7), to specify the com-
municative tasks they should be equipped to face. Learners should also be brought to
reﬂect on their own communicative needs as one aspect of awareness-raising and self-
direction.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
the communicative tasks in the personal, public, occupational and/or educational domains
that the learner will need/be equipped/be required to tackle;
•
the assessment of learner needs on which the choice of tasks is based.
54

Language use and the language user/learner
4.3.3
In the educational domain it may be helpful to distinguish between the tasks
which learners are equipped/required to tackle as language users and those in which they
engage as part of the language learning process itself.
With regard to tasks as vehicles for planning, carrying out and reporting on language
learning and teaching, information can be given as appropriate concerning:
•
Types of task, e.g. simulations, roleplay, classroom interaction etc.;
•
Goals, e.g. the group-based learning goals in relation to the differing, less predictable
goals of participants;
•
Input, e.g. instructions, materials, etc. selected or produced by teachers and/or learn-
ers;
•
Outcomes, e.g. output artefacts such as texts, summaries, tables, presentations, etc.
and learning outcomes such as improved competences, awareness, insights, strate-
gies, experience in decision-making and negotiation, etc.;
•
Activities, e.g. cognitive/affective, physical/reﬂective, group/pair/individual, processes:
receptive and productive, etc. (see section 4.5);
•
Roles, the roles of participants both in the tasks themselves and in task planning and
management;
•
Monitoring and evaluation of the relative success of the task conceived and as carried
out using such criteria as relevance, difﬁculty expectations and constraints, and
appropriateness.
A fuller account of the role of tasks in language learning and teaching is given in
Chapter 7.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
the tasks that learners will need/be equipped/be required to undertake in the
educational domain, a) as participants in guided, goal-oriented interactions, projects,
simulations, roleplays, etc., b) in other ways when the L2 (second language) is used as the
medium of instruction in teaching of i) the language itself ii) other curricular subjects,
etc.
4.3.4
Ludic uses of language
The use of language for playful purposes often plays an important part in language lear-
ning and development, but is not conﬁned to the educational domain. Examples of ludic
activities include:
Social language games:
•
oral (story with mistakes; how, when, where, etc.);
•
written (consequences, hangman, etc.);
•
audio-visual (picture lotto, snap, etc.);
55

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
board and card games (Scrabble, Lexicon, Diplomacy, etc.);
•
charades, miming, etc.
Individual activities:
•
puzzles (crossword, rebus, anagram, etc.);
•
media games (TV and radio: chiffres et lettres, Catchword, etc.).
Verbal joking (punning, etc.) e.g. in:
•
advertisements e.g. (for a car) ‘Make your money go a long way’;
•
newspaper headlines e.g. ‘Feminism or bust!’;
•
grafﬁti e.g. ‘Grammar rules – O.K.?’.
4.3.5
Aesthetic uses of language
Imaginative and artistic uses of language are important both educationally and in their
own right. Aesthetic activities may be productive, receptive, interactive or mediating (see
4.4.4 below), and may be oral or written. They include such activities as:
•
singing (nursery rhymes, folk songs, pop songs, etc.)
•
retelling and rewriting stories, etc.
•
listening to, reading, writing and speaking imaginative texts (stories, rhymes, etc.)
including audio-visual texts, cartoons, picture stories, etc.
•
performing scripted or unscripted plays, etc.
•
the production, reception and performance of literary texts, e.g.: reading and writing
texts (short stories, novels, poetry, etc.) and performing and watching/listening to
recitals, drama, opera, etc.
This summary treatment of what has traditionally been a major, often dominant, aspect
of modern language studies in upper secondary and higher education may appear dis-
missive. It is not intended to be so. National and regional literatures make a major con-
tribution to the European cultural heritage, which the Council of Europe sees as ‘a
valuable common resource to be protected and developed’. Literary studies serve many
more educational purposes – intellectual, moral and emotional, linguistic and cultural
– than the purely aesthetic. It is much to be hoped that teachers of literature at all levels
may ﬁnd many sections of the Framework relevant to their concerns and useful in
making their aims and methods more transparent.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
which ludic and aesthetic uses of language the learner will need/be equipped/be required
to make.
56

Language use and the language user/learner
4.4
Communicative language activities and strategies
To carry out communicative tasks, users have to engage in communicative language
activities and operate communication strategies.
Many communicative activities, such as conversation and correspondence, are interac-
tive, that is to say, the participants alternate as producers and receivers, often with several
turns.
In other cases, as when speech is recorded or broadcast or written texts are sent out or
published, producers are separated from receivers, whom they may not even know and
who are unable to respond. In these cases the communicative event can be regarded as
the speaking, writing, listening to or reading of a text.
In most cases, the user as speaker or writer is producing his own text to express his
own meanings. In others, he/she is acting as a channel of communication (often, but not
necessarily, in different languages) between two or more persons who for one reason or
another cannot communicate directly. This process, mediation, may be interactive or not.
Many if not most situations involve a mixture of activity types. In a school language
class, for instance, a learner may be required to listen to a teacher’s exposition, to read a
textbook, silently or aloud, to interact with fellow pupils in group or project work, to
write exercises or an essay, and even to mediate, whether as an educational activity or in
order to assist another pupil.
Strategies are a means the language user exploits to mobilise and balance his or her
resources, to activate skills and procedures, in order to fulﬁl the demands of communi-
cation in context and successfully complete the task in question in the most comprehen-
sive or most economical way feasible depending on his or her precise purpose.
Communication strategies should therefore not be viewed simply with a disability model
– as a way of making up for a language deﬁcit or a miscommunication. Native speakers
regularly employ communication strategies of all kinds (which will be discussed below)
when the strategy is appropriate to the communicative demands placed upon them.
The use of communication strategies can be seen as the application of the metacogni-
tive principles: Pre-planning, Execution, Monitoring, and Repair Action to the different kinds
of communicative activity: Reception, Interaction, Production and Mediation. The word
‘strategies’ has been used in different ways. Here what is meant is the adoption of a par-
ticular line of action in order to maximise effectiveness. Skills that are an inevitable part
of the process of understanding or articulating the spoken and written word (e.g. chunk-
ing a stream of sound in order to decode it into a string of words carrying propositional
meaning) are treated as lower-level skills, in relation to the appropriate communicative
process (see section 4.5).
Progress in language learning is most clearly evidenced in the learner’s ability to
engage in observable language activities and to operate communication strategies. They
are therefore a convenient basis for the scaling of language ability. A suggested scaling
is given in this chapter for various aspects of the activities and strategies discussed.
4.4.1
Productive activities and strategies
Productive activities and strategies include both speaking and writing activities.
57

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
4.4.1.1
In oral production (speaking) activities the language user produces an oral text
which is received by an audience of one or more listeners. Examples of speaking activ-
ities include:
•
public address (information, instructions, etc.)
•
addressing audiences (speeches at public meetings, university lectures, sermons,
entertainment, sports commentaries, sales presentations, etc.).
They may involve, for example:
•
reading a written text aloud;
•
speaking from notes, or from a written text or visual aids (diagrams, pictures, charts,
etc.);
•
acting out a rehearsed role;
•
speaking spontaneously;
•
singing.
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
Overall spoken production;
•
Sustained monologue: describing experience;
•
Sustained monologue: putting a case (e.g. in debate);
•
Public announcements;
•
Addressing audiences.
OVERALL ORAL PRODUCTION
Can produce clear, smoothly ﬂowing well-structured speech with an effective logical structure which
C2
helps the recipient to notice and remember signiﬁcant points.
Can give clear, detailed descriptions and presentations on complex subjects, integrating sub-themes,
C1
developing particular points and rounding off with an appropriate conclusion.
Can give clear, systematically developed descriptions and presentations, with appropriate highlighting
of signiﬁcant points, and relevant supporting detail.
B2
Can give clear, detailed descriptions and presentations on a wide range of subjects related to his/her ﬁeld
of interest, expanding and supporting ideas with subsidiary points and relevant examples.
Can reasonably ﬂuently sustain a straightforward description of one of a variety of subjects within
B1
his/her ﬁeld of interest, presenting it as a linear sequence of points.
Can give a simple description or presentation of people, living or working conditions, daily routines,
A2
likes/dislikes, etc. as a short series of simple phrases and sentences linked into a list.
A1
Can produce simple mainly isolated phrases about people and places.
58

Language use and the language user/learner
SUSTAINED MONOLOGUE: Describing experience
C2
Can give clear, smoothly ﬂowing, elaborate and often memorable descriptions.
Can give clear, detailed descriptions of complex subjects.
C1
Can give elaborate descriptions and narratives, integrating sub-themes, developing particular points
and rounding off with an appropriate conclusion.
B2
Can give clear, detailed descriptions on a wide range of subjects related to his/her ﬁeld of interest.
Can give straightforward descriptions on a variety of familiar subjects within his/her ﬁeld of interest.
Can reasonably ﬂuently relate a straightforward narrative or description as a linear sequence of points.
Can give detailed accounts of experiences, describing feelings and reactions.
B1
Can relate details of unpredictable occurrences, e.g. an accident.
Can relate the plot of a book or ﬁlm and describe his/her reactions.
Can describe dreams, hopes and ambitions.
Can describe events, real or imagined.
Can narrate a story.
Can tell a story or describe something in a simple list of points. Can describe everyday aspects of his/her
environment e.g. people, places, a job or study experience.
Can give short, basic descriptions of events and activities.
Can describe plans and arrangements, habits and routines, past activities and personal experiences.
A2
Can use simple descriptive language to make brief statements about and compare objects and
possessions.
Can explain what he/she likes or dislikes about something.
Can describe his/her family, living conditions, educational background, present or most recent job.
Can describe people, places and possessions in simple terms.
A1
Can describe him/herself, what he/she does and where he/she lives.
SUSTAINED MONOLOGUE: Putting a case (e.g. in a debate)
C2
No descriptor available
C1
No descriptor available
Can develop an argument systematically with appropriate highlighting of signiﬁcant points, and
relevant supporting detail.
B2
Can develop a clear argument, expanding and supporting his/her points of view at some length with
subsidiary points and relevant examples.
Can construct a chain of reasoned argument:
Can explain a viewpoint on a topical issue giving the advantages and disadvantages of various options.
Can develop an argument well enough to be followed without difﬁculty most of the time.
B1
Can brieﬂy give reasons and explanations for opinions, plans and actions.
A2
No descriptor available
A1
No descriptor available
59

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
PUBLIC ANNOUNCEMENTS
C2
No descriptor available
Can deliver announcements ﬂuently, almost effortlessly, using stress and intonation to convey ﬁner
C1
shades of meaning precisely.
Can deliver announcements on most general topics with a degree of clarity, ﬂuency and spontaneity
B2
which causes no strain or inconvenience to the listener.
Can deliver short, rehearsed announcements on a topic pertinent to everyday occurrences in his/her ﬁeld
B1
which, despite possibly very foreign stress and intonation, are nevertheless clearly intelligible.
Can deliver very short, rehearsed announcements of predictable, learnt content which are intelligible to
A2
listeners who are prepared to concentrate.
A1
No descriptor available
Note: The descriptors on this sub-scale have not been empirically calibrated.
ADDRESSING AUDIENCES
Can present a complex topic conﬁdently and articulately to an audience unfamiliar with it, structuring
C2
and adapting the talk ﬂexibly to meet the audience’s needs.
Can handle difﬁcult and even hostile questioning.
Can give a clear, well-structured presentation of a complex subject, expanding and supporting points of
C1
view at some length with subsidiary points, reasons and relevant examples.
Can handle interjections well, responding spontaneously and almost effortlessly.
Can give a clear, systematically developed presentation, with highlighting of signiﬁcant points, and
relevant supporting detail.
Can depart spontaneously from a prepared text and follow up interesting points raised by members of
the audience, often showing remarkable ﬂuency and ease of expression.
B2
Can give a clear, prepared presentation, giving reasons in support of or against a particular point of
view and giving the advantages and disadvantages of various options.
Can take a series of follow up questions with a degree of ﬂuency and spontaneity which poses no strain
for either him/herself or the audience.
Can give a prepared straightforward presentation on a familiar topic within his/her ﬁeld which is clear
enough to be followed without difﬁculty most of the time, and in which the main points are explained
B1
with reasonable precision.
Can take follow up questions, but may have to ask for repetition if the speech was rapid.
Can give a short, rehearsed presentation on a topic pertinent to his/her everyday life, brieﬂy give reasons
and explanations for opinions, plans and actions.
Can cope with a limited number of straightforward follow up questions.
A2
Can give a short, rehearsed, basic presentation on a familiar subject.
Can answer straightforward follow up questions if he/she can ask for repetition and if some help with
the formulation of his/her reply is possible.
A1
Can read a very short, rehearsed statement – e.g. to introduce a speaker, propose a toast.
Note: The descriptors on this sub-scale have been created by recombining elements of descriptors
from other scales.
60

Language use and the language user/learner
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
in what range of oral production (speaking) activities the learner will need/be equipped/be
required to engage.
4.4.1.2
In written production (writing) activities the language user as writer produces a
written text which is received by a readership of one or more readers.
Examples of writing activities include:
•
completing forms and questionnaires;
•
writing articles for magazines, newspapers, newsletters, etc.;
•
producing posters for display;
•
writing reports, memoranda, etc.;
•
making notes for future reference;
•
taking down messages from dictation, etc.;
•
creative and imaginative writing;
•
writing personal or business letters, etc.
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
Overall written production;
•
Creative writing;
•
Reports and essays.
OVERALL WRITTEN PRODUCTION
Can write clear, smoothly ﬂowing, complex texts in an appropriate and effective style and a logical
C2
structure which helps the reader to ﬁnd signiﬁcant points.
Can write clear, well-structured texts of complex subjects, underlining the relevant salient issues,
C1
expanding and supporting points of view at some length with subsidiary points, reasons and relevant
examples, and rounding off with an appropriate conclusion.
Can write clear, detailed texts on a variety of subjects related to his/her ﬁeld of interest, synthesising and
B2
evaluating information and arguments from a number of sources.
Can write straightforward connected texts on a range of familiar subjects within his ﬁeld of interest, by
B1
linking a series of shorter discrete elements into a linear sequence.
Can write a series of simple phrases and sentences linked with simple connectors like ‘and’, ‘but’ and
A2
‘because’.
A1
Can write simple isolated phrases and sentences.
Note: The descriptors on this scale and on the two sub-scales which follow (Creative Writing;
Reports and Essays) have not been empirically calibrated with the measurement model. The
descriptors for these three scales have therefore been created by recombining elements of
descriptors from other scales.
61

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
CREATIVE WRITING
Can write clear, smoothly ﬂowing, and fully engrossing stories and descriptions of experience in a style
C2
appropriate to the genre adopted.
Can write clear, detailed, well-structured and developed descriptions and imaginative texts in an
C1
assured, personal, natural style appropriate to the reader in mind.
Can write clear, detailed descriptions of real or imaginary events and experiences, marking the relationship
between ideas in clear connected text, and following established conventions of the genre concerned.
B2
Can write clear, detailed descriptions on a variety of subjects related to his/her ﬁeld of interest.
Can write a review of a ﬁlm, book or play.
Can write straightforward, detailed descriptions on a range of familiar subjects within his/her ﬁeld of
interest.
B1
Can write accounts of experiences, describing feelings and reactions in simple connected text.
Can write a description of an event, a recent trip – real or imagined.
Can narrate a story.
Can write about everyday aspects of his/her environment, e.g. people, places, a job or study experience in
linked sentences.
Can write very short, basic descriptions of events, past activities and personal experiences.
A2
Can write a series of simple phrases and sentences about their family, living conditions, educational
background, present or most recent job.
Can write short, simple imaginary biographies and simple poems about people.
Can write simple phrases and sentences about themselves and imaginary people, where they live and
A1
what they do.
REPORTS AND ESSAYS
Can produce clear, smoothly ﬂowing, complex reports, articles or essays which present a case, or give
critical appreciation of proposals or literary works.
C2
Can provide an appropriate and effective logical structure which helps the reader to ﬁnd signiﬁcant points.
Can write clear, well-structured expositions of complex subjects, underlining the relevant salient issues.
C1
Can expand and support points of view at some length with subsidiary points, reasons and relevant
examples.
Can write an essay or report which develops an argument systematically with appropriate highlighting
of signiﬁcant points and relevant supporting detail.
Can evaluate different ideas or solutions to a problem.
B2
Can write an essay or report which develops an argument, giving reasons in support of or against a
particular point of view and explaining the advantages and disadvantages of various options.
Can synthesise information and arguments from a number of sources.
Can write short, simple essays on topics of interest.
Can summarise, report and give his/her opinion about accumulated factual information on familiar
routine and non-routine matters within his/her ﬁeld with some conﬁdence.
B1
Can write very brief reports to a standard conventionalised format, which pass on routine factual
information and state reasons for actions.
A2
No descriptor available
A1
No descriptor available
62

Language use and the language user/learner
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
for what purposes the learner will need/be equipped/be required to engage in which
writing activities.
4.4.1.3
Production strategies involve mobilising resources, balancing between dif-
ferent competences – exploiting strengths and underplaying weaknesses – in order to
match the available potential to the nature of the task. Internal resources will be ac-
tivated, possibly involving conscious preparation (Rehearsing), possibly calculating the
effect of different styles, discourse structures or formulations (Considering audience), pos-
sibly looking things up or obtaining assistance when dealing with a deﬁcit (Locating
resources). When adequate resources have not been mobilised or located the language user
may ﬁnd it advisable to go for a more modest version of the task and, for example, write
a postcard rather than a letter; on the other hand, having located appropriate support,
he or she may choose to do the reverse – scaling up the task (Task adjustment). In a similar
way, without sufﬁcient resources the learner/user may have to compromise what he or
she would really like to express in order to match the linguistic means available; con-
versely, additional linguistic support, perhaps available later during re-drafting, may
enable him or her to be more ambitious in forming and expressing his or her thoughts
(Message adjustment).
Ways of scaling down ambitions to ﬁt resources in order to ensure success in a more
limited area have been described as Avoidance strategies; scaling up and ﬁnding ways to
cope have been described as Achievement strategies. In using achievement strategies the
language user adopts a positive approach with what resources he or she has: approximat-
ing and overgeneralising with simpler language, paraphrasing or describing aspects of
what he or she wants to say, even ‘foreignising’ L1 (ﬁrst language) expressions
(Compensating); using highly accessible pre-fabricated language he or she feels sure of –
‘islands of reliability’ – to create stepping stones through what for the user is a novel sit-
uation or concept he or she wants to express (Building on previous knowledge), or just having
a go with what he or she can half remember and thinks might work (Trying out). Whether
or not the language user is aware of compensating, skating over thin ice or using lan-
guage tentatively, feedback in terms of facial expression, gesture and subsequent moves
in the conversation offer him or her the opportunity to monitor the success of the com-
munication (Monitoring success). In addition, particularly in non-interactive activities (e.g.
giving a presentation, writing a report) the language user may consciously monitor lin-
guistically as well as communicatively, spot slips and ‘favourite’ mistakes and correct
them (Self-correction).
•
Planning
Rehearsing;
Locating resources;
Considering audience;
Task adjustment;
Message adjustment.
63

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
Execution
Compensating;
Building on previous knowledge;
Trying out.
•
Evaluation
Monitoring success.
•
Repair
Self-correction.
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
Planning;
•
Compensating;
•
Monitoring and repair.
PLANNING
C2
As B2
C1
As B2
B2
Can plan what is to be said and the means to say it, considering the effect on the recipient/s.
Can rehearse and try out new combinations and expressions, inviting feedback.
B1
Can work out how to communicate the main point(s) he/she wants to get across, exploiting any resources
available and limiting the message to what he/she can recall or ﬁnd the means to express.
A2
Can recall and rehearse an appropriate set of phrases from his/her repertoire.
A1
No descriptor available
COMPENSATING
C2
Can substitute an equivalent term for a word he/she can’t recall so smoothly that it is scarcely noticeable.
C1
As B2+
B2
Can use circumlocution and paraphrase to cover gaps in vocabulary and structure.
Can deﬁne the features of something concrete for which he/she can’t remember the word.
Can convey meaning by qualifying a word meaning something similar (e.g. a truck for people = bus).
B1
Can use a simple word meaning something similar to the concept he/she wants to convey and invites
‘correction’.
Can foreignise a mother tongue word and ask for conﬁrmation.
Can use an inadequate word from his/her repertoire and use gesture to clarify what he/she wants to say.
A2
Can identify what he/she means by pointing to it (e.g. ‘I’d like this, please’).
A1
No descriptor available
64

Language use and the language user/learner
MONITORING AND REPAIR
C2
Can backtrack and restructure around a difﬁculty so smoothly the interlocutor is hardly aware of it.
Can backtrack when he/she encounters a difﬁculty and reformulate what he/she wants to say without
C1
fully interrupting the ﬂow of speech.
Can correct slips and errors if he/she becomes conscious of them or if they have led to
B2
misunderstandings.
Can make a note of ‘favourite mistakes’ and consciously monitor speech for it/them.
Can correct mix-ups with tenses or expressions that lead to misunderstandings provided the interlocutor
indicates there is a problem.
B1
Can ask for conﬁrmation that a form used is correct.
Can start again using a different tactic when communication breaks down.
A2
No descriptor available
A1
No descriptor available
4.4.2
Receptive activities and strategies
These include listening and reading activities.
4.4.2.1
In aural reception (listening) activities the language user as listener receives and
processes a spoken input produced by one or more speakers. Listening activities include:
•
listening to public announcements (information, instructions, warnings, etc.);
•
listening to media (radio, TV, recordings, cinema);
•
listening as a member of a live audience (theatre, public meetings, public lectures,
entertainments, etc.);
•
listening to overheard conversations, etc.
In each case the user may be listening:
•
for gist;
•
for speciﬁc information;
•
for detailed understanding;
•
for implications, etc.
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
Overall listening comprehension;
•
Understanding interaction between native speakers;
•
Listening as a member of a live audience;
•
Listening to announcements and instructions;
•
Listening to audio media and recordings.
65

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
OVERALL LISTENING COMPREHENSION
Has no difﬁculty in understanding any kind of spoken language, whether live or broadcast, delivered at
C2
fast native speed.
Can understand enough to follow extended speech on abstract and complex topics beyond his/her own
ﬁeld, though he/she may need to conﬁrm occasional details, especially if the accent is unfamiliar.
C1
Can recognise a wide range of idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms, appreciating register shifts.
Can follow extended speech even when it is not clearly structured and when relationships are only
implied and not signalled explicitly.
Can understand standard spoken language, live or broadcast, on both familiar and unfamiliar topics
normally encountered in personal, social, academic or vocational life. Only extreme background noise,
inadequate discourse structure and/or idiomatic usage inﬂuences the ability to understand.
B2
Can understand the main ideas of propositionally and linguistically complex speech on both concrete
and abstract topics delivered in a standard dialect, including technical discussions in his/her ﬁeld of
specialisation.
Can follow extended speech and complex lines of argument provided the topic is reasonably familiar,
and the direction of the talk is sign-posted by explicit markers.
Can understand straightforward factual information about common everyday or job related topics,
identifying both general messages and speciﬁc details, provided speech is clearly articulated in a
B1
generally familiar accent.
Can understand the main points of clear standard speech on familiar matters regularly encountered in
work, school, leisure etc., including short narratives.
Can understand enough to be able to meet needs of a concrete type provided speech is clearly and slowly
articulated.
A2
Can understand phrases and expressions related to areas of most immediate priority (e.g. very basic
personal and family information, shopping, local geography, employment) provided speech is clearly and
slowly articulated.
Can follow speech which is very slow and carefully articulated, with long pauses for him/her to
A1
assimilate meaning.
UNDERSTANDING CONVERSATION BETWEEN NATIVE SPEAKERS
C2
As C1
Can easily follow complex interactions between third parties in group discussion and debate, even on
C1
abstract, complex unfamiliar topics.
Can keep up with an animated conversation between native speakers.
B2
Can with some effort catch much of what is said around him/her, but may ﬁnd it difﬁcult to participate
effectively in discussion with several native speakers who do not modify their language in any way.
Can generally follow the main points of extended discussion around him/her, provided speech is clearly
B1
articulated in standard dialect.
A2
Can generally identify the topic of discussion around him/her, when it is conducted slowly and clearly.
A1
No descriptor available
66

Language use and the language user/learner
LISTENING AS A MEMBER OF A LIVE AUDIENCE
Can follow specialised lectures and presentations employing a high degree of colloquialism, regional
C2
usage or unfamiliar terminology.
C1
Can follow most lectures, discussions and debates with relative ease.
Can follow the essentials of lectures, talks and reports and other forms of academic/professional
B2
presentation which are propositionally and linguistically complex.
Can follow a lecture or talk within his/her own ﬁeld, provided the subject matter is familiar and the
presentation straightforward and clearly structured.
B1
Can follow in outline straightforward short talks on familiar topics provided these are delivered in
clearly articulated standard speech.
A2
No descriptor available
A1
No descriptor available
LISTENING TO ANNOUNCEMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS
C2
As C1
Can extract speciﬁc information from poor quality, audibly distorted public announcements, e.g. in a
station, sports stadium etc.
C1
Can understand complex technical information, such as operating instructions, speciﬁcations for
familiar products and services.
Can understand announcements and messages on concrete and abstract topics spoken in standard
B2
dialect at normal speed.
Can understand simple technical information, such as operating instructions for everyday equipment.
B1
Can follow detailed directions.
Can catch the main point in short, clear, simple messages and announcements.
A2
Can understand simple directions relating to how to get from X to Y, by foot or public transport.
Can understand instructions addressed carefully and slowly to him/her and follow short, simple
A1
directions.
67

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
LISTENING TO AUDIO MEDIA AND RECORDINGS
C2
As C1
Can understand a wide range of recorded and broadcast audio material, including some non-standard
C1
usage, and identify ﬁner points of detail including implicit attitudes and relationships between
speakers.
Can understand recordings in standard dialect likely to be encountered in social, professional or
academic life and identify speaker viewpoints and attitudes as well as the information content.
B2
Can understand most radio documentaries and most other recorded or broadcast audio material
delivered in standard dialect and can identify the speaker’s mood, tone etc.
Can understand the information content of the majority of recorded or broadcast audio material on
topics of personal interest delivered in clear standard speech.
B1
Can understand the main points of radio news bulletins and simpler recorded material about familiar
subjects delivered relatively slowly and clearly.
Can understand and extract the essential information from short, recorded passages dealing with
A2
predictable everyday matters which are delivered slowly and clearly.
A1
No descriptor available
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
to what range of inputs the learner will need/be equipped/be required to listen;
•
for what purposes the learner will listen to the input;
•
in what mode of listening the learner will engage.
4.4.2.2
In visual reception (reading) activities the user as reader receives and processes as
input written texts produced by one or more writers. Examples of reading activities include:
•
reading for general orientation;
•
reading for information, e.g. using reference works;
•
reading and following instructions;
•
reading for pleasure.
The language user may read:
•
for gist;
•
for speciﬁc information;
•
for detailed understanding;
•
for implications, etc.
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
Overall reading comprehension;
•
Reading correspondence;
68

Language use and the language user/learner
•
Reading for orientation;
•
Reading for information and argument;
•
Reading instructions.
OVERALL READING COMPREHENSION
Can understand and interpret critically virtually all forms of the written language including abstract,
structurally complex, or highly colloquial literary and non-literary writings.
C2
Can understand a wide range of long and complex texts, appreciating subtle distinctions of style and
implicit as well as explicit meaning.
Can understand in detail lengthy, complex texts, whether or not they relate to his/her own area of
C1
speciality, provided he/she can reread difﬁcult sections.
Can read with a large degree of independence, adapting style and speed of reading to different texts and
B2
purposes, and using appropriate reference sources selectively. Has a broad active reading vocabulary, but
may experience some difﬁculty with low frequency idioms.
Can read straightforward factual texts on subjects related to his/her ﬁeld and interest with a
B1
satisfactory level of comprehension.
Can understand short, simple texts on familiar matters of a concrete type which consist of high
frequency everyday or job-related language.
A2
Can understand short, simple texts containing the highest frequency vocabulary, including a proportion
of shared international vocabulary items.
Can understand very short, simple texts a single phrase at a time, picking up familiar names, words
A1
and basic phrases and rereading as required.
READING CORRESPONDENCE
C2
As C1
C1
Can understand any correspondence given the occasional use of a dictionary.
B2
Can read correspondence relating to his/her ﬁeld of interest and readily grasp the essential meaning.
Can understand the description of events, feelings and wishes in personal letters well enough to
B1
correspond regularly with a pen friend.
Can understand basic types of standard routine letters and faxes (enquiries, orders, letters of
A2
conﬁrmation etc.) on familiar topics.
Can understand short simple personal letters.
A1
Can understand short, simple messages on postcards.
69

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
READING FOR ORIENTATION
C2
As B2
C1
As B2
Can scan quickly through long and complex texts, locating relevant details.
B2
Can quickly identify the content and relevance of news items, articles and reports on a wide range of
professional topics, deciding whether closer study is worthwhile.
Can scan longer texts in order to locate desired information, and gather information from different
parts of a text, or from different texts in order to fulﬁl a speciﬁc task.
B1
Can ﬁnd and understand relevant information in everyday material, such as letters, brochures and
short ofﬁcial documents.
Can ﬁnd speciﬁc, predictable information in simple everyday material such as advertisements,
prospectuses, menus, reference lists and timetables.
Can locate speciﬁc information in lists and isolate the information required (e.g. use the ‘Yellow Pages’ to
A2
ﬁnd a service or tradesman).
Can understand everyday signs and notices: in public places, such as streets, restaurants, railway
stations; in workplaces, such as directions, instructions, hazard warnings.
Can recognise familiar names, words and very basic phrases on simple notices in the most common
A1
everyday situations.
READING FOR INFORMATION AND ARGUMENT
C2
As C1
Can understand in detail a wide range of lengthy, complex texts likely to be encountered in social,
C1
professional or academic life, identifying ﬁner points of detail including attitudes and implied as well as
stated opinions.
Can obtain information, ideas and opinions from highly specialised sources within his/her ﬁeld.
Can understand specialised articles outside his/her ﬁeld, provided he/she can use a dictionary
occasionally to conﬁrm his/her interpretation of terminology.
B2
Can understand articles and reports concerned with contemporary problems in which the writers adopt
particular stances or viewpoints.
Can identify the main conclusions in clearly signalled argumentative texts.
Can recognise the line of argument in the treatment of the issue presented, though not necessarily in
B1
detail.
Can recognise signiﬁcant points in straightforward newspaper articles on familiar subjects.
Can identify speciﬁc information in simpler written material he/she encounters such as letters, brochures
A2
and short newspaper articles describing events.
Can get an idea of the content of simpler informational material and short simple descriptions,
A1
especially if there is visual support.
70

Language use and the language user/learner
READING INSTRUCTIONS
C2
As C1
Can understand in detail lengthy, complex instructions on a new machine or procedure, whether or not
C1
the instructions relate to his/her own area of speciality, provided he/she can reread difﬁcult sections.
Can understand lengthy, complex instructions in his ﬁeld, including details on conditions and warnings,
B2
provided he/she can reread difﬁcult sections.
B1
Can understand clearly written, straightforward instructions for a piece of equipment.
Can understand regulations, for example safety, when expressed in simple language.
A2
Can understand simple instructions on equipment encountered in everyday life – such as a public telephone.
A1
Can follow short, simple written directions (e.g. to go from X to Y).
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
for what purposes the learner will need, or wish/be equipped/be required to read;
•
in which modes the learner will need or wish/be equipped/be required to read.
4.4.2.3
In audio-visual reception the user simultaneously receives an auditory and a
visual input. Such activities include:
•
following a text as it is read aloud;
•
watching TV, video, or a ﬁlm with subtitles;
•
using new technologies (multi-media, CD ROM, etc.).
An illustrative scale is provided for watching TV and ﬁlm:
WATCHING TV AND FILM
C2
As C1
C1
Can follow ﬁlms employing a considerable degree of slang and idiomatic usage.
Can understand most TV news and current affairs programmes.
B2
Can understand documentaries, live interviews, talk shows, plays and the majority of ﬁlms in standard
dialect.
Can understand a large part of many TV programmes on topics of personal interest such as interviews,
short lectures, and news reports when the delivery is relatively slow and clear.
B1
Can follow many ﬁlms in which visuals and action carry much of the storyline, and which are delivered
clearly in straightforward language.
Can catch the main points in TV programmes on familiar topics when the delivery is relatively slow and
clear.
Can identify the main point of TV news items reporting events, accidents etc. where the visual supports
the commentary.
A2
Can follow changes of topic of factual TV news items, and form an idea of the main content.
A1
No descriptor available
71

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
4.4.2.4
Reception strategies involve identifying the context and knowledge of the world
relevant to it, activating in the process what are thought to be appropriate schemata.
These in turn set up expectations about the organisation and content of what is to come
(Framing). During the process of receptive activity cues identiﬁed in the total context (lin-
guistic and non-linguistic) and the expectations in relation to that context set up by the
relevant schemata are used to build up a representation of the meaning being expressed
and a hypothesis as to the communicative intention behind it. Through a process of suc-
cessive approximation, apparent and possible gaps in the message are ﬁlled in order to
ﬂesh out the representation of meaning, and the signiﬁcance of the message and of its
constituent parts are worked out (Inferring). The gaps ﬁlled through inference may be
caused by linguistic restrictions, difﬁcult receptive conditions, lack of associated knowl-
edge, or by assumed familiarity, obliqueness, understatement or phonetic reduction on
the part of the speaker/writer. The viability of the current model arrived at through this
process is checked against the evidence of the incoming co-textual and contextual cues
to see if they ‘ﬁt’ the activated schema – the way one is interpreting the situation
(Hypothesis testing). An identiﬁed mismatch leads to a return to step one (Framing) in the
search for an alternative schema which would better explain the incoming cues (Revising
Hypotheses).
•
Planning: Framing (selecting mental set, activating schemata, setting up expecta-
tions).
•
Execution: Identifying cues and inferring from them.
•
Evaluation: Hypothesis testing: matching cues to schemata.
•
Repair: Revising hypotheses.
An illustrative scale is provided:
IDENTIFYING CUES AND INFERRING (Spoken & Written)
C2
As C1
C1
Is skilled at using contextual, grammatical and lexical cues to infer attitude, mood and intentions and
anticipate what will come next.
Can use a variety of strategies to achieve comprehension, including listening for main points; checking
B2
comprehension by using contextual clues.
Can identify unfamiliar words from the context on topics related to his/her ﬁeld and interests.
B1
Can extrapolate the meaning of occasional unknown words from the context and deduce sentence
meaning provided the topic discussed is familiar.
Can use an idea of the overall meaning of short texts and utterances on everyday topics of a concrete
A2
type to derive the probable meaning of unknown words from the context.
A1
No descriptor available
72

Language use and the language user/learner
4.4.3
Interactive activities and strategies
4.4.3.1
Spoken interaction
In interactive activities the language user acts alternately as speaker and listener with
one or more interlocutors so as to construct conjointly, through the negotiation of
meaning following the co-operative principle, conversational discourse.
Reception and production strategies are employed constantly during interaction.
There are also classes of cognitive and collaborative strategies (also called discourse strat-
egies and co-operation strategies) concerned with managing co-operation and interac-
tion such as turntaking and turngiving, framing the issue and establishing a line of
approach, proposing and evaluating solutions, recapping and summarising the point
reached, and mediating in a conﬂict.
Examples of interactive activities include:
•
transactions
•
casual conversation
•
informal discussion
•
formal discussion
•
debate
•
interview
•
negotiation
•
co-planning
•
practical goal-oriented co-operation
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
Overall spoken interaction
•
Understanding a native speaker interlocutor
•
Conversation
•
Informal discussion
•
Formal discussion and meetings
•
Goal-oriented co-operation
•
Transactions to obtain goods and services
•
Information exchange
•
Interviewing and being interviewed
73

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
OVERALL SPOKEN INTERACTION
Has a good command of idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms with awareness of connotative levels
of meaning. Can convey ﬁner shades of meaning precisely by using, with reasonable accuracy, a wide
C2
range of modiﬁcation devices. Can backtrack and restructure around a difﬁculty so smoothly the
interlocutor is hardly aware of it.
Can express him/herself ﬂuently and spontaneously, almost effortlessly. Has a good command of a broad
lexical repertoire allowing gaps to be readily overcome with circumlocutions. There is little obvious
C1
searching for expressions or avoidance strategies; only a conceptually difﬁcult subject can hinder a
natural, smooth ﬂow of language.
Can use the language ﬂuently, accurately and effectively on a wide range of general, academic,
vocational or leisure topics, marking clearly the relationships between ideas. Can communicate
spontaneously with good grammatical control without much sign of having to restrict what he/she
wants to say, adopting a level of formality appropriate to the circumstances.
B2
Can interact with a degree of ﬂuency and spontaneity that makes regular interaction, and sustained
relationships with native speakers quite possible without imposing strain on either party. Can highlight
the personal signiﬁcance of events and experiences, account for and sustain views clearly by providing
relevant explanations and arguments.
Can communicate with some conﬁdence on familiar routine and non-routine matters related to his/her
interests and professional ﬁeld. Can exchange, check and conﬁrm information, deal with less routine
situations and explain why something is a problem. Can express thoughts on more abstract, cultural
topics such as ﬁlms, books, music etc.
B1
Can exploit a wide range of simple language to deal with most situations likely to arise whilst
travelling. Can enter unprepared into conversation on familiar topics, express personal opinions and
exchange information on topics that are familiar, of personal interest or pertinent to everyday life (e.g.
family, hobbies, work, travel and current events).
Can interact with reasonable ease in structured situations and short conversations, provided the other
person helps if necessary. Can manage simple, routine exchanges without undue effort; can ask and
answer questions and exchange ideas and information on familiar topics in predictable everyday
situations.
A2
Can communicate in simple and routine tasks requiring a simple and direct exchange of information on
familiar and routine matters to do with work and free time. Can handle very short social exchanges but
is rarely able to understand enough to keep conversation going of his/her own accord.
Can interact in a simple way but communication is totally dependent on repetition at a slower rate of
A1
speech, rephrasing and repair. Can ask and answer simple questions, initiate and respond to simple
statements in areas of immediate need or on very familiar topics.
74

Language use and the language user/learner
UNDERSTANDING A NATIVE SPEAKER INTERLOCUTOR
Can understand any native speaker interlocutor, even on abstract and complex topics of a specialist
C2
nature beyond his/her own ﬁeld, given an opportunity to adjust to a non-standard accent or dialect.
Can understand in detail speech on abstract and complex topics of a specialist nature beyond his/her
C1
own ﬁeld, though he/she may need to conﬁrm occasional details, especially if the accent is unfamiliar.
Can understand in detail what is said to him/her in the standard spoken language even in a noisy
B2
environment.
Can follow clearly articulated speech directed at him/her in everyday conversation, though will
B1
sometimes have to ask for repetition of particular words and phrases.
Can understand enough to manage simple, routine exchanges without undue effort.
Can generally understand clear, standard speech on familiar matters directed at him/her, provided
he/she can ask for repetition or reformulation from time to time.
A2
Can understand what is said clearly, slowly and directly to him/her in simple everyday conversation; can
be made to understand, if the speaker can take the trouble.
Can understand everyday expressions aimed at the satisfaction of simple needs of a concrete type,
delivered directly to him/her in clear, slow and repeated speech by a sympathetic speaker.
A1
Can understand questions and instructions addressed carefully and slowly to him/her and follow short,
simple directions.
75

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
CONVERSATION
C2
Can converse comfortably and appropriately, unhampered by any linguistic limitations in conducting a
full social and personal life.
Can use language ﬂexibly and effectively for social purposes, including emotional, allusive and joking
C1
usage.
Can engage in extended conversation on most general topics in a clearly participatory fashion, even in a
noisy environment.
B2
Can sustain relationships with native speakers without unintentionally amusing or irritating them or
requiring them to behave other than they would with a native speaker.
Can convey degrees of emotion and highlight the personal signiﬁcance of events and experiences.
Can enter unprepared into conversations on familiar topics.
Can follow clearly articulated speech directed at him/her in everyday conversation, though will
sometimes have to ask for repetition of particular words and phrases.
B1
Can maintain a conversation or discussion but may sometimes be difﬁcult to follow when trying to say
exactly what he/she would like to.
Can express and respond to feelings such as surprise, happiness, sadness, interest and indifference.
Can establish social contact: greetings and farewells; introductions; giving thanks.
Can generally understand clear, standard speech on familiar matters directed at him/her, provided
he/she can ask for repetition or reformulation from time to time.
Can participate in short conversations in routine contexts on topics of interest.
Can express how he/she feels in simple terms, and express thanks.
A2
Can handle very short social exchanges but is rarely able to understand enough to keep conversation
going of his/her own accord, though he/she can be made to understand if the speaker will take the
trouble.
Can use simple everyday polite forms of greeting and address.
Can make and respond to invitations, suggestions and apologies.
Can say what he/she likes and dislikes.
Can make an introduction and use basic greeting and leave-taking expressions.
Can ask how people are and react to news.
A1
Can understand everyday expressions aimed at the satisfaction of simple needs of a concrete type,
delivered directly to him/her in clear, slow and repeated speech by a sympathetic speaker.
76

Language use and the language user/learner
INFORMAL DISCUSSION (WITH FRIENDS)
C2
As C1
Can easily follow and contribute to complex interactions between third parties in group discussion even
C1
on abstract, complex unfamiliar topics.
Can keep up with an animated discussion between native speakers.
Can express his/her ideas and opinions with precision, and present and respond to complex lines of
argument convincingly.
Can take an active part in informal discussion in familiar contexts, commenting, putting point of view
B2
clearly, evaluating alternative proposals and making and responding to hypotheses.
Can with some effort catch much of what is said around him/her in discussion, but may ﬁnd it difﬁcult
to participate effectively in discussion with several native speakers who do not modify their language in
any way.
Can account for and sustain his/her opinions in discussion by providing relevant explanations,
arguments and comments.
Can follow much of what is said around him/her on general topics provided interlocutors avoid very
idiomatic usage and articulate clearly.
Can express his/her thoughts about abstract or cultural topics such as music, ﬁlms. Can explain why
something is a problem.
Can give brief comments on the views of others.
Can compare and contrast alternatives, discussing what to do, where to go, who or which to choose, etc.
B1
Can generally follow the main points in an informal discussion with friends provided speech is clearly
articulated in standard dialect.
Can give or seek personal views and opinions in discussing topics of interest.
Can make his/her opinions and reactions understood as regards solutions to problems or practical
questions of where to go, what to do, how to organise an event (e.g. an outing).
Can express belief, opinion, agreement and disagreement politely.
Can generally identify the topic of discussion around him/her when it is conducted slowly and clearly.
Can discuss what to do in the evening, at the weekend.
Can make and respond to suggestions.
A2
Can agree and disagree with others.
Can discuss everyday practical issues in a simple way when addressed clearly, slowly and directly.
Can discuss what to do, where to go and make arrangements to meet.
A1
No descriptors available
77

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
FORMAL DISCUSSION AND MEETINGS
Can hold his/her own in formal discussion of complex issues, putting an articulate and persuasive
C2
argument, at no disadvantage to native speakers.
Can easily keep up with the debate, even on abstract, complex unfamiliar topics.
C1
Can argue a formal position convincingly, responding to questions and comments and answering
complex lines of counter argument ﬂuently, spontaneously and appropriately.
Can keep up with an animated discussion, identifying accurately arguments supporting and opposing
points of view.
Can express his/her ideas and opinions with precision, present and respond to complex lines of argument
convincingly.
B2
Can participate actively in routine and non-routine formal discussion.
Can follow the discussion on matters related to his/her ﬁeld, understand in detail the points given
prominence by the speaker.
Can contribute, account for and sustain his/her opinion, evaluate alternative proposals and make and
respond to hypotheses.
Can follow much of what is said that is related to his/her ﬁeld, provided interlocutors avoid very
idiomatic usage and articulate clearly.
Can put over a point of view clearly, but has difﬁculty engaging in debate.
B1
Can take part in routine formal discussion of familiar subjects which is conducted in clearly articulated
speech in the standard dialect and which involves the exchange of factual information, receiving
instructions or the discussion of solutions to practical problems.
Can generally follow changes of topic in formal discussion related to his/her ﬁeld which is conducted
slowly and clearly.
Can exchange relevant information and give his/her opinion on practical problems when asked directly,
A2
provided he/she receives some help with formulation and can ask for repetition of key points if necessary.
Can say what he/she thinks about things when addressed directly in a formal meeting, provided he/she
can ask for repetition of key points if necessary.
A1
No descriptor available
Note: The descriptors on this sub-scale have not been empirically calibrated with the measurement
model.
78

Language use and the language user/learner
GOAL-ORIENTED CO-OPERATION
(e.g. Repairing a car, discussing a document, organising an event)
C2
As B2
C1
As B2
Can understand detailed instructions reliably.
Can help along the progress of the work by inviting others to join in, say what they think, etc.
B2
Can outline an issue or a problem clearly, speculating about causes or consequences, and weighing
advantages and disadvantages of different approaches.
Can follow what is said, though he/she may occasionally have to ask for repetition or clariﬁcation if the
other people’s talk is rapid or extended.
Can explain why something is a problem, discuss what to do next, compare and contrast alternatives.
Can give brief comments on the views of others.
B1
Can generally follow what is said and, when necessary, can repeat back part of what someone has said
to conﬁrm mutual understanding.
Can make his/her opinions and reactions understood as regards possible solutions or the question of
what to do next, giving brief reasons and explanations.
Can invite others to give their views on how to proceed.
Can understand enough to manage simple, routine tasks without undue effort, asking very simply for
repetition when he/she does not understand.
Can discuss what to do next, making and responding to suggestions, asking for and giving directions.
A2
Can indicate when he/she is following and can be made to understand what is necessary, if the speaker
takes the trouble.
Can communicate in simple and routine tasks using simple phrases to ask for and provide things, to get
simple information and to discuss what to do next.
Can understand questions and instructions addressed carefully and slowly to him/her and follow short,
A1
simple directions.
Can ask people for things, and give people things.
79

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
TRANSACTIONS TO OBTAIN GOODS AND SERVICES
C2
As B2
C1
As B2
Can cope linguistically to negotiate a solution to a dispute like an undeserved trafﬁc ticket, ﬁnancial
responsibility for damage in a ﬂat, for blame regarding an accident.
Can outline a case for compensation, using persuasive language to demand satisfaction and state clearly
B2
the limits to any concession he/she is prepared to make.
Can explain a problem which has arisen and make it clear that the provider of the service/customer
must make a concession.
Can deal with most transactions likely to arise whilst travelling, arranging travel or accommodation, or
dealing with authorities during a foreign visit.
Can cope with less routine situations in shops, post ofﬁces, banks, e.g. returning an unsatisfactory
B1
purchase. Can make a complaint.
Can deal with most situations likely to arise when making travel arrangements through an agent or
when actually travelling, e.g. asking passenger where to get off for an unfamiliar destination.
Can deal with common aspects of everyday living such as travel, lodgings, eating and shopping.
Can get all the information needed from a tourist ofﬁce, as long as it is of a straightforward, non-
specialised nature.
Can ask for and provide everyday goods and services.
A2
Can get simple information about travel, use public transport: buses, trains, and taxis, ask and give
directions, and buy tickets.
Can ask about things and make simple transactions in shops, post ofﬁces or banks.
Can give and receive information about quantities, numbers, prices, etc.
Can make simple purchases by stating what is wanted and asking the price.
Can order a meal.
Can ask people for things and give people things.
A1
Can handle numbers, quantities, cost and time.
80

Language use and the language user/learner
INFORMATION EXCHANGE
C2
As B2
C1
As B2
Can understand and exchange complex information and advice on the full range of matters related to
his/her occupational role.
B2
Can pass on detailed information reliably.
Can give a clear, detailed description of how to carry out a procedure.
Can synthesise and report information and arguments from a number of sources.
Can exchange, check and conﬁrm accumulated factual information on familiar routine and non-routine
matters within his/her ﬁeld with some conﬁdence.
Can describe how to do something, giving detailed instructions.
Can summarise and give his or her opinion about a short story, article, talk, discussion, interview, or
B1
documentary and answer further questions of detail.
Can ﬁnd out and pass on straightforward factual information.
Can ask for and follow detailed directions.
Can obtain more detailed information.
Can understand enough to manage simple, routine exchanges without undue effort.
Can deal with practical everyday demands: ﬁnding out and passing on straightforward factual
information.
Can ask and answer questions about habits and routines.
Can ask and answer questions about pastimes and past activities.
A2
Can give and follow simple directions and instructions, e.g. explain how to get somewhere.
Can communicate in simple and routine tasks requiring a simple and direct exchange of information.
Can exchange limited information on familiar and routine operational matters.
Can ask and answer questions about what they do at work and in free time.
Can ask for and give directions referring to a map or plan.
Can ask for and provide personal information.
Can understand questions and instructions addressed carefully and slowly to him/her and follow short,
simple directions.
Can ask and answer simple questions, initiate and respond to simple statements in areas of immediate
A1
need or on very familiar topics.
Can ask and answer questions about themselves and other people, where they live, people they know,
things they have.
Can indicate time by such phrases as next week, last Friday, in November, three o’clock.
81

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
INTERVIEWING AND BEING INTERVIEWED
Can keep up his/her side of the dialogue extremely well, structuring the talk and interacting
C2
authoritatively with complete ﬂuency as interviewer or interviewee, at no disadvantage to a native
speaker.
Can participate fully in an interview, as either interviewer or interviewee, expanding and developing the
C1
point being discussed ﬂuently without any support, and handling interjections well.
Can carry out an effective, ﬂuent interview, departing spontaneously from prepared questions, following
up and probing interesting replies.
B2
Can take initiatives in an interview, expand and develop ideas with little help or prodding from an
interviewer.
Can provide concrete information required in an interview/consultation (e.g. describe symptoms to a
doctor) but does so with limited precision.
Can carry out a prepared interview, checking and conﬁrming information, though he/she may
occasionally have to ask for repetition if the other person’s response is rapid or extended.
B1
Can take some initiatives in an interview/consultation (e.g. to bring up a new subject) but is very
dependent on interviewer in the interaction.
Can use a prepared questionnaire to carry out a structured interview, with some spontaneous follow up
questions.
Can make him/herself understood in an interview and communicate ideas and information on familiar
topics, provided he/she can ask for clariﬁcation occasionally, and is given some help to express what
A2
he/she wants to.
Can answer simple questions and respond to simple statements in an interview.
Can reply in an interview to simple direct questions spoken very slowly and clearly in direct non-
A1
idiomatic speech about personal details.
4.4.3.2
Written interaction
Interaction through the medium of written language includes such activities as:
•
passing and exchanging notes, memos, etc. when spoken interaction is impossible
and inappropriate;
•
correspondence by letter, fax, e-mail, etc.;
•
negotiating the text of agreements, contracts, communiqués, etc. by reformulating
and exchanging drafts, amendments, proof corrections, etc.;
•
participating in on-line or off-line computer conferences.
4.4.3.3
Face-to-face interaction may of course involve a mixture of media: spoken,
written, audio-visual, paralinguistic (see section 4.4.5.2) and paratextual (see 4.4.5.3).
4.4.3.4
With the increasing sophistication of computer software, interactive man-
machine communication is coming to play an ever more important part in the public,
occupational, educational and even personal domains.
82

Language use and the language user/learner
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
overall written interaction
•
correspondence
•
notes, messages and forms
OVERALL WRITTEN INTERACTION
C2
As C1
C1
Can express him/herself with clarity and precision, relating to the addressee ﬂexibly and effectively.
B2
Can express news and views effectively in writing, and relate to those of others.
Can convey information and ideas on abstract as well as concrete topics, check information and ask
about or explain problems with reasonable precision.
B1
Can write personal letters and notes asking for or conveying simple information of immediate relevance,
getting across the point he/she feels to be important.
A2
Can write short, simple formulaic notes relating to matters in areas of immediate need.
A1
Can ask for or pass on personal details in written form.
CORRESPONDENCE
C2
As C1
Can express him/herself with clarity and precision in personal correspondence, using language ﬂexibly
C1
and effectively, including emotional, allusive and joking usage.
Can write letters conveying degrees of emotion and highlighting the personal signiﬁcance of events and
B2
experiences and commenting on the correspondent’s news and views.
Can write personal letters giving news and expressing thoughts about abstract or cultural topics such as
music, ﬁlms.
B1
Can write personal letters describing experiences, feelings and events in some detail.
A2
Can write very simple personal letters expressing thanks and apology.
A1
Can write a short simple postcard.
83

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
NOTES, MESSAGES & FORMS
C2
As B1
C1
As B1
B2
As B1
Can take messages communicating enquiries, explaining problems.
B1
Can write notes conveying simple information of immediate relevance to friends, service people, teachers
and others who feature in his/her everyday life, getting across comprehensibly the points he/she feels are
important.
Can take a short, simple message provided he/she can ask for repetition and reformulation.
A2
Can write short, simple notes and messages relating to matters in areas of immediate need.
Can write numbers and dates, own name, nationality, address, age, date of birth or arrival in the
A1
country, etc. such as on a hotel registration form.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
in which kinds of communicative interaction the learner will need/be equipped/be required
to engage;
•
which roles the learner will need/be equipped/be required to play in the interaction.
4.4.3.5
Interaction strategies
Interaction encompasses both receptive and productive activity as well as activity unique
to the construction of joint discourse and therefore all reception strategies and all pro-
duction strategies mentioned above are also involved in interaction. However, the fact
that spoken interaction entails the collective creation of meaning by the establishment
of some degree of common mental context, deﬁning what can be taken as given, working
out where people are coming from, converging towards each other or deﬁning and main-
taining a comfortable distance, usually in real time, means that in addition to receptive
and productive strategies there is a class of strategies exclusive to interaction concerned
with the management of this process. In addition, the fact that interaction is primarily
face to face tends to provide far greater redundancy both in textual, linguistic terms and
with regard to paralinguistic features, contextual cues, all of which can be made more
or less elaborate, more or less explicit to the extent that the constant monitoring of the
process by the participants indicates that this is appropriate.
Planning for spoken interaction involves the activation of schemata or a ‘praxeogram’
(i.e. a diagram representing the structure of a communicative interaction) of the
exchanges possible and probable in the forthcoming activity (Framing) and consideration
of the communicative distance from other interlocutors (Identifying information/opinion
gap; Judging what can be taken as given) in order to decide on options and prepare possible
moves in those exchanges (Planning moves). During the activity itself, language users
adopt turntaking strategies in order to obtain the discourse initiative (Taking the ﬂoor), to
cement the collaboration in the task and keep the discussion on course (Co-operating:
84

Language use and the language user/learner
interpersonal), to help mutual understanding and maintain a focused approach to the task
at hand (Co-operating: ideational), and so that they themselves can ask for assistance in for-
mulating something (Asking for Help). As with Planning, Evaluation takes place at a com-
municative level: judging the ‘ﬁt’ between the schemata thought to apply, and what is
actually happening (Monitoring: schemata, praxeogram) and the extent to which things are
going the way one wants them to go (Monitoring: effect, success); miscomprehension or
intolerable ambiguity leads to requests for clariﬁcation which may be on a communica-
tive or linguistic level (Asking for, giving clariﬁcation), and to active intervention to re-estab-
lish communication and clear up misunderstandings when necessary (Communication
Repair).
Planning
•
framing (selecting praxeogram)
•
identifying information/opinion gap (felicity conditions)
•
judging what can be presupposed
•
planning moves
Execution
•
taking the ﬂoor
•
co-operating (interpersonal)
•
co-operating (ideational)
•
dealing with the unexpected
•
asking for help
Evaluation
•
monitoring (schema, praxeogram)
•
monitoring (effect, success)
Repair
•
asking for clariﬁcation
•
giving clariﬁcation
•
communication repair
Illustrative scales are provided for:
•
taking the ﬂoor;
•
co-operating;
•
asking for clariﬁcation.
85

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
TAKING THE FLOOR (TURNTAKING)
C2
As C1
Can select a suitable phrase from a readily available range of discourse functions to preface his/her
C1
remarks appropriately in order to get the ﬂoor, or to gain time and keep the ﬂoor whilst thinking.
Can intervene appropriately in discussion, exploiting appropriate language to do so.
Can initiate, maintain and end discourse appropriately with effective turntaking.
Can initiate discourse, take his/her turn when appropriate and end conversation when he/she needs to,
B2
though he/she may not always do this elegantly.
Can use stock phrases (e.g. ‘That’s a difﬁcult question to answer’) to gain time and keep the turn whilst
formulating what to say.
Can intervene in a discussion on a familiar topic, using a suitable phrase to get the ﬂoor.
B1
Can initiate, maintain and close simple, face-to-face conversation on topics that are familiar or of
personal interest.
Can use simple techniques to start, maintain, or end a short conversation.
Can initiate, maintain and close simple, face-to-face conversation.
A2
Can ask for attention.
A1
No descriptor available
CO-OPERATING
C2
As C1
C1
Can relate own contribution skilfully to those of other speakers.
Can give feedback on and follow up statements and inferences and so help the development of the
B2
discussion.
Can help the discussion along on familiar ground, conﬁrming comprehension, inviting others in, etc.
Can exploit a basic repertoire of language and strategies to help keep a conversation or discussion
going.
Can summarise the point reached in a discussion and so help focus the talk.
B1
Can repeat back part of what someone has said to conﬁrm mutual understanding and help keep the
development of ideas on course. Can invite others into the discussion.
A2
Can indicate when he/she is following.
A1
No descriptor available
86

Language use and the language user/learner
ASKING FOR CLARIFICATION
C2
As B2
C1
As B2
Can ask follow-up questions to check that he/she has understood what a speaker intended to say, and get
B2
clariﬁcation of ambiguous points.
B1
Can ask someone to clarify or elaborate what they have just said.
Can ask very simply for repetition when he/she does not understand.
Can ask for clariﬁcation about key words or phrases not understood using stock phrases.
A2
Can say he/she didn’t follow.
A1
No descriptor available
4.4.4
Mediating activities and strategies
In mediating activities, the language user is not concerned to express his/her own mean-
ings, but simply to act as an intermediary between interlocutors who are unable to
understand each other directly – normally (but not exclusively) speakers of different lan-
guages. Examples of mediating activities include spoken interpretation and written
translation as well as summarising and paraphrasing texts in the same language, when
the language of the original text is not understandable to the intended recipient e.g.:
4.4.4.1
oral mediation:
•
simultaneous interpretation (conferences, meetings, formal speeches, etc.);
•
consecutive interpretation (speeches of welcome, guided tours, etc.);
•
informal interpretation:
•
•
of foreign visitors in own country
•
•
of native speakers when abroad
•
•
in social and transactional situations for friends, family, clients, foreign guests,
etc.
•
•
of signs, menus, notices, etc.
4.4.4.2
written mediation:
•
exact translation (e.g. of contracts, legal and scientiﬁc texts, etc.);
•
literary translation (novels, drama, poetry, libretti, etc.);
•
summarising gist (newspaper and magazine articles, etc.) within L2 or between L1
and L2;
•
paraphrasing (specialised texts for lay persons, etc.).
4.4.4.3
Mediation strategies reﬂect ways of coping with the demands of using ﬁnite
resources to process information and establish equivalent meaning. The process may
87

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
involve some pre-planning to organise and maximise resources (Developing background
knowledge; Locating supports; Preparing a glossary) as well as consideration of how to tackle
the task at hand (Considering the interlocutors’ needs; Selecting the size of interpretation unit).
During the process of interpretation, glossing, or translation, the mediator needs to look
ahead at what is coming next whilst formulating what has just been said, generally jug-
gling with two different ‘chunks’ or interpretation units simultaneously (Previewing). He
or she needs to note ways of expressing things to extend his or her glossary (Noting pos-
sibilities, equivalences), and to construct islands of reliability, (prefabricated chunks) which
free up processing capacity for previewing. On the other hand he or she also needs to use
techniques to skate over uncertainty and avoid breakdown – whilst maintaining preview-
ing (Bridging gaps). Evaluation takes place at a communicative level (Checking congruence)
and at a linguistic level (Checking consistency of usage) and, certainly with written transla-
tion, leads to repair through consultation of reference works and people knowledgeable
in the ﬁeld concerned (reﬁning by consulting dictionaries, thesaurus; consulting experts, sources).
•
Planning
Developing background knowledge;
Locating supports;
Preparing a glossary;
Considering interlocutors’ needs;
Selecting unit of interpretation.
•
Execution
Previewing: processing input and formulating the last chunk simulta-
neously in real time;
Noting possibilities, equivalences;
Bridging gaps.
•
Evaluation
Checking congruence of two versions;
Checking consistency of usage.
•
Repair
Reﬁning by consulting dictionaries, thesaurus;
Consulting experts, sources.
No illustrative scales are yet available.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
the mediating activities in which the learner will need/be equipped/be required to engage.
4.4.5
Non-verbal communication
4.4.5.1
Practical actions accompanying language activities (normally face-to-face oral
activities) include:
•
pointing, e.g. by ﬁnger, hand, glance, nod. These actions are used with deictics for the
identiﬁcation of objects, persons, etc., such as, ‘Can I have that one? No, not that one,
that one’;
•
demonstration, accompanying deictics and simple present verbs and pro-verbs, such
as, ‘I take this and ﬁx it here, like this. Now you do the same!’;
88

Language use and the language user/learner
•
clearly observable actions, which can be assumed as known in narrative, comment,
orders, etc., such as, ‘Don’t do that!’, ‘Well done there!’, ‘Oh no, he’s dropped it!’. In
all these cases, the utterance is uninterpretable unless the action is perceived.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
how skilled learners will need/be equipped/be required to be in matching actions to words
and vice-versa;
•
in which situations they will need/be equipped/be required to do so.
4.4.5.2
Paralinguistics includes:
Body language. Paralinguistic body language differs from practical actions accompanied
by language in that it carries conventionalised meanings, which may well differ from
one culture to another. For example, the following are used in many European coun-
tries:
•
gesture (e.g. shaken ﬁst for ‘protest’);
•
facial expression (e.g. smile or scowl);
•
posture (e.g. slump for ‘despair’ or sitting forward for ‘keen interest’);
•
eye contact (e.g. a conspiratorial wink or a disbelieving stare);
•
body contact (e.g. kiss or handshake);
•
proxemics (e.g. standing close or aloof).
use of extra-linguistic speech-sounds. Such sounds (or syllables) are paralinguistic in that
they carry conventionalised meanings but lie outside the regular phonological system of
a language, for example, (in English):
‘sh’
requesting silence
‘s-s-s’
expressing public disapproval
‘ugh’
expressing disgust
‘humph’
expressing disgruntlement
‘tut, tut’
expressing polite disapproval
prosodic qualities. The use of these qualities is paralinguistic if they carry conventional-
ised meanings (e.g. related to attitudes and states of mind), but fall outside the regular
phonological system in which prosodic features of length, tone, stress may play a part,
for example:
voice quality
(gruff, breathy, piercing, etc.)
pitch
(growling, whining, screaming, etc.)
loudness
(whispering, murmuring, shouting, etc.)
length
(e.g. ve-e-e-ery good!)
Many paralinguistic effects are produced by combinations of pitch, length, loudness and
voice quality.
89

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Paralinguistic communication should be carefully distinguished from developed sign
languages, which fall outside the present scope of CEF, though experts in that ﬁeld may
ﬁnd many of its concepts and categories relevant to their concerns.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
which target paralinguistic behaviours the learner will need/be equipped/be required to
a) recognise and understand b) use.
4.4.5.3
Paratextual features: a similarly ‘paralinguistic’ role is played in relation to
written texts by such devices as:
•
illustrations (photographs, drawings, etc.)
•
charts, tables, diagrams, ﬁgures, etc.
•
typographic features (fonts, pitch, spacing, underlining, layout, etc.)
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
which paratextual features the learner will need/be equipped/be required to a) recognise
and respond to and b) use.
4.5
Communicative language processes
To act as a speaker, writer, listener or reader, the learner must be able to carry out a se-
quence of skilled actions.
To speak, the learner must be able to:
•
plan and organise a message (cognitive skills);
•
formulate a linguistic utterance (linguistic skills);
•
articulate the utterance (phonetic skills).
To write, the learner must be able to:
•
organise and formulate the message (cognitive and linguistic skills);
•
hand-write or type the text (manual skills) or otherwise transfer the text to writing.
To listen, the learner must be able to:
•
perceive the utterance (auditory phonetic skills);
•
identify the linguistic message (linguistic skills);
•
understand the message (semantic skills);
•
interpret the message (cognitive skills).
90

Language use and the language user/learner
To read, the reader must be able to:
•
perceive the written text (visual skills);
•
recognise the script (orthographic skills);
•
identify the message (linguistic skills);
•
understand the message (semantic skills);
•
interpret the message (cognitive skills).
The observable stages of these processes are well understood. Others – events in the
central nervous system – are not. The following analysis is intended only to identify some
parts of the process relevant to the development of language proﬁciency.
4.5.1
Planning
The selection, interrelation and co-ordination of components of general and communi-
cative language competences (see Chapter 5) to be brought to bear on the communica-
tive event in order to accomplish the user/learner’s communicative intentions.
4.5.2
Execution
4.5.2.1
Production
The production process involves two components:
The formulation component takes the output from the planning component and assem-
bles it into linguistic form. This involves lexical, grammatical, phonological (and in the
case of writing, orthographic) processes which are distinguishable and appear (e.g. in
cases of dysphasia) to have some degree of independence but whose exact interrelation
is not fully understood.
The articulation component organises the motor innervation of the vocal apparatus to
convert the output of the phonological processes into co-ordinated movements of the
speech organs to produce a train of speech waves constituting the spoken utterance, or
alternatively the motor innervation of the musculature of the hand to produce hand-
written or typewritten text.
4.5.2.2
Reception
The receptive process involves four steps which, while they take place in linear sequence
(bottom-up), are constantly updated and reinterpreted (top-down) in the light of real
world knowledge, schematic expectations and new textual understanding in a subcon-
scious interactive process.
•
the perception of speech and writing: sound/character and word recognition (cursive
and print);
•
the identiﬁcation of the text, complete or partial, as relevant;
•
the semantic and cognitive understanding of the text as a linguistic entity;
•
the interpretation of the message in context.
91

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
The skills involved include:
•
perceptual skills;
•
memory;
•
decoding skills;
•
inferencing;
•
predicting;
•
imagination;
•
rapid scanning;
•
referring back and forth.
Comprehension, especially of written texts, can be assisted by the proper use of aids,
including reference materials such as:
•
dictionaries (monolingual and bilingual);
•
thesauruses;
•
pronunciation dictionaries;
•
electronic dictionaries, grammars, spell-checkers and other aids;
•
reference grammars.
4.5.2.3
Interaction
The processes involved in spoken interaction differ from a simple succession of speaking
and listening activities in a number of ways:
•
productive and receptive processes overlap. Whilst the interlocutor’s utterance, still
incomplete, is being processed, the planning of the user’s response is initiated – on
the basis of a hypothesis as to its nature, meaning and interpretation.
•
discourse is cumulative. As an interaction proceeds, the participants converge in
their readings of a situation, develop expectations and focus on relevant issues. These
processes are reﬂected in the form of the utterances produced.
In written interaction (e.g. a correspondence by letter, fax, e-mail, etc.) the processes of
reception and production remain distinct (though electronic interaction, e.g. via the
Internet, is becoming ever closer to ‘real time’ interaction). The effects of cumulative dis-
course are similar to those for spoken interaction.
4.5.3
Monitoring
The strategic component deals with updating of mental activities and competences in
the course of communication. This applies equally to the productive and receptive pro-
cesses. It should be noted that an important factor in the control of the productive pro-
cesses is the feedback the speaker/writer receives at each stage: formulation, articulation
and acoustic.
In a wider sense, the strategic component is also concerned with the monitoring of the
communicative process as it proceeds, and with ways of managing the process accord-
ingly, e.g.:
92

Language use and the language user/learner
•
dealing with the unexpected, such as changes of domain, theme schema, etc.;
•
dealing with communication breakdown in interaction or production as a result of
such factors as memory lapses;
•
inadequate communicative competence for the task in hand by using compensating
strategies like restructuring, circumlocution, substitution, asking for help;
•
misunderstandings and misinterpretation (by asking for clariﬁcation);
•
slips of the tongue, mishearings (by using repair strategies).
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
to what degree which skills are required for the satisfactory accomplishment of the
communicative tasks the learner is expected to undertake;
•
which skills can be presupposed and which will need to be developed;
•
which reference aids the learner will need/be equipped/be required to use effectively.
4.6
Texts
As explained in Chapter 2, ‘text’ is used to cover any piece of language, whether a spoken
utterance or a piece of writing, which users/learners receive, produce or exchange. There
can thus be no act of communication through language without a text; language act-
ivities and processes are all analysed and classiﬁed in terms of the relation of the
user/learner and any interlocutor(s) to the text whether viewed as a ﬁnished product, an
artefact, or as an objective or as a product in process of elaboration. These activities and
processes are dealt with in some detail in section 4.4 and 4.5. Texts have many different
functions in social life and result in corresponding differences in form and substance.
Different media are used for different purposes. Differences of medium and purpose and
function lead to corresponding differences not only in the context of messages, but also
in their organisation and presentation. Accordingly, texts may be classiﬁed into differ-
ent text types belonging to different genres. See also Section 5.2.3.2 (macrofunctions).
4.6.1
Texts and media
Every text is carried by a particular medium, normally by sound waves or written arte-
facts. Subcategories can be established according to physical properties of the medium
which affect the processes of production and reception, e.g. for speech, direct close-up
speech as against public address or telephone, or for writing print as against cursive
writing, or different scripts. To communicate using a particular medium, users/learners
must have the necessary sensory/motor equipment. In the case of speech, they must be
able to hear well under the given conditions and have ﬁne control of the organs of pho-
nation and articulation. In the case of normal writing, they must be able to see with the
necessary visual acuity and have control of their hands. They must then have the know-
ledge and skills described elsewhere, on the one hand to identify, understand and inter-
pret the text or on the other to organise, formulate and produce it. This will be true for
any text, whatever its nature.
93

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
The above must not discourage people who have learning difﬁculties or sensory/motor
disabilities from learning or using foreign languages. Devices ranging from simple hearing
aids to eye-operated computer speech synthesisers have been developed to overcome even
the most severe sensory and motor difﬁculties, whilst the use of appropriate methods and
strategies have enabled young people with learning difﬁculties to achieve worthwhile
foreign language learning objectives with remarkable success. Lip-reading, the exploita-
tion of residual hearing and phonetic training have enabled the severely deaf to achieve a
high level of speech communication in a second or foreign language. Given the necessary
determination and encouragement, human beings have an extraordinary capacity to over-
come obstacles to communication and the production and understanding of texts.
In principle, any text can be carried by any medium. However, in practice medium and
text are more closely related. Scripts do not generally carry the full meaningful phonetic
information carried by speech. Alphabetic scripts do not generally carry prosodic infor-
mation systematically (e.g. stress, intonation, pausing, stylistic reduction, etc.).
Consonantal and logographic scripts carry less. Paralinguistic features are usually unrep-
resented in any script, though they may of course be referred to in the text of a novel,
play, etc. In compensation, paratextual features are employed in writing, which are tied
to the spatial medium and not available to speech. Moreover, the nature of the medium
exercises a strong pressure on the nature of the text and vice-versa. As extreme examples,
a stone inscription is difﬁcult and expensive to produce and is very durable and immov-
able. An air-letter is cheap and easy to use, easily transported, but light and fragile.
Electronic communication using a VDU need not produce a permanent artefact at all.
The texts they typically carry are correspondingly contrasted: in the one case, a carefully
composed, frugal text preserving monumental information for future generations and
inducing reverence for the place and person(s) celebrated, and in the other, a hastily
scribbled personal note of topical but ephemeral interest to the correspondents. A
similar ambiguity of classiﬁcation thus arises between text-types and media to that
between text-types and activities. Books, magazines and newspapers are, from their phys-
ical nature and appearance, different media. From the nature and structure of their con-
tents they are different text-types. Medium and text-type are closely related and both are
derivative from the function they perform.
4.6.2
Media include:
•
voice (viva voce);
•
telephone, videophone, teleconference;
•
public address systems;
•
radio broadcasts;
•
TV;
•
cinema ﬁlms;
•
computer (e-mail, CD Rom, etc.);
•
videotape, -cassette, -disc;
•
audiotape, -cassette, -disc;
•
print;
•
manuscript;
•
etc.
94

Language use and the language user/learner
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
which media the learner will need/be equipped/be required to handle a) receptively
b) productively c) interactively d) in mediation.
4.6.3
Text-types include:
Spoken, e.g.:
public announcements and instructions;
public speeches, lectures, presentations, sermons;
rituals (ceremonies, formal religious services);
entertainment (drama, shows, readings, songs);
sports commentaries (football, cricket, boxing, horse-racing, etc.);
news broadcasts;
public debates and discussion;
inter-personal dialogues and conversations;
telephone conversations;
job interviews.
Written, e.g.:
books, ﬁction and non-ﬁction, including literary journals;
magazines;
newspapers;
instruction manuals (DIY, cookbooks, etc.);
textbooks;
comic strips;
brochures, prospectuses;
leaﬂets;
advertising material;
public signs and notices;
supermarket, shop, market stall signs;
packaging and labelling on goods;
tickets, etc.;
forms and questionnaires;
dictionaries (monolingual and bilingual), thesauri;
business and professional letters, faxes;
personal letters;
essays and exercises;
memoranda, reports and papers;
notes and messages, etc.;
databases (news, literature, general information, etc.).
The following scales, based upon those developed in the Swiss projects described in
Appendix B, give examples of activities involving a written text output produced in
response to, respectively, a spoken or written input. Only the higher levels of these
95

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
activities can enable a learner to meet the requirements of university studies or profes-
sional training, though some ability to deal with simple input text and to produce a
written response is feasible at more modest levels.
NOTE-TAKING (LECTURES, SEMINARS, ETC.)
Is aware of the implications and allusions of what is said and can make notes on them as well as on the
C2
actual words used by the speaker.
Can take detailed notes during a lecture on topics in his/her ﬁeld of interest, recording the information
C1
so accurately and so close to the original that the notes could also be useful to other people.
Can understand a clearly structured lecture on a familiar subject, and can take notes on points which
B2
strike him/her as important, even though he/she tends to concentrate on the words themselves and
therefore to miss some information.
Can take notes during a lecture which are precise enough for his/her own use at a later date, provided
the topic is within his/her ﬁeld of interest and the talk is clear and well-structured.
B1
Can take notes as a list of key points during a straightforward lecture, provided the topic is familiar,
and the talk is both formulated in simple language and delivered in clearly articulated standard speech.
A2
No descriptor available
A1
No descriptor available
PROCESSING TEXT
Can summarise information from different sources, reconstructing arguments and accounts in a
C2
coherent presentation of the overall result.
C1
Can summarise long, demanding texts.
Can summarise a wide range of factual and imaginative texts, commenting on and discussing
contrasting points of view and the main themes.
B2
Can summarise extracts from news items, interviews or documentaries containing opinions, argument
and discussion.
Can summarise the plot and sequence of events in a ﬁlm or play.
Can collate short pieces of information from several sources and summarise them for somebody else.
B1
Can paraphrase short written passages in a simple fashion, using the original text wording and
ordering.
Can pick out and reproduce key words and phrases or short sentences from a short text within the
learner’s limited competence and experience.
A2
Can copy out short texts in printed or clearly handwritten format.
A1
Can copy out single words and short texts presented in standard printed format.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
with which text types the learner will need/be equipped/be required to deal
•
a) receptively, b) productively, c) interactively, d) in mediation.
96

Language use and the language user/learner
Sections 4.6.1 to 4.6.3 conﬁne themselves to text types and the media which carry them.
Matters often dealt with under ‘genre’ are treated in this Framework in 5.2.3 ‘pragmatic
competences’.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
whether and, if so, how, the differences in the medium and in the psycholinguistic
processes involved in speaking, listening, reading and writing in productive, receptive
and interactive activities are taken into account a) in the selection, adaptation or com-
position of the spoken and written texts presented to learners, b) in the way that the learn-
ers are expected to handle the texts, and c) in the evaluation of the texts which learners
produce;
•
whether and, if so, how learners and teachers are made critically aware of the textual char-
acteristics of a) classroom discourse b) testing and examination rubrics and answers, and
c) instructional and reference materials;
•
whether and, if so, how learners are brought to make the texts they produce more appro-
priate to: a) their communicative purposes, b) the contexts of use (domains, situations,
recipients, constraints), c) the media employed.
4.6.4
Texts and activities
The output of the process of language production is a text, which once it is uttered or
written becomes an artefact carried by a particular medium and independent of its pro-
ducer. The text then functions as the input to the process of language reception.
Written artefacts are concrete objects, whether carved in stone, handwritten, typed,
printed or electronically generated. They allow communication to take place despite
the complete separation of producer and receiver in space and/or time – a property on
which human society largely depends. In face-to-face oral interaction the medium is
acoustic, sound waves which are normally ephemeral and irrecoverable. Indeed, few
speakers are able to reproduce in exact detail a text they have just uttered in the course
of conversation. Once it has served its communicative purposes it is discarded from
memory – if indeed it has ever lodged there as a complete entity. However, as a result
of modern technology, sound waves can be recorded and broadcast or stored in another
medium and later reconverted into speech-waves. In this way, the temporo-spatial sep-
aration of producer and receiver is made possible. Furthermore, recordings of sponta-
neous discourse and conversation can be transcribed and analysed at leisure as texts.
There is necessarily a close correlation between the categories proposed for the descrip-
tion of language activities and the texts resulting from those activities. Indeed the
same word may be used for both. ‘Translation’ may denote either the act of translating
or the text produced. Similarly, ‘conversation’, ‘debate’ or ‘interview’ may denote the
communicative interaction of the participants, but equally the sequence of their
exchanged utterances, which constitutes a text of a particular type belonging to a cor-
responding genre.
All the activities of production, reception, interaction and mediation take place in
time. The real-time nature of speech is apparent, both in the activities of speaking and
97

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
listening and in the medium itself. ‘Before’ and ‘after’ in a spoken text are to be taken
quite literally. In a written text, which is usually (excluding ‘scrolled’ texts) a static spatial
artefact, this is not necessarily so. In production, a written text can be edited, passages
inserted or deleted. We cannot tell in what order the elements have been produced,
though they are presented in a linear order as a string of symbols. Receptively, the
reader’s eye is free to move over the text in any way, possibly following the linear
sequence in strict order, as a child learning to read will generally do. Skilled, mature
readers are much more likely to scan a text for highly information-bearing elements in
order to establish an overall structure of meaning and then return to read more closely
– and if need be to re-read a number of times – such words, phrases, sentences and para-
graphs as are of particular relevance to their needs and purposes. An author or editor
may well use paratextual features (see section 4.4.5.3) to steer this process and, indeed,
plan the text in accordance with the way in which it is expected to be read by the audi-
ence for which it is intended. Similarly, a spoken text may be carefully planned in
advance so as to appear to be spontaneous, yet to ensure that an essential message is
effectively conveyed under the different conditions that constrain the reception of
speech. Process and product are indissolubly linked.
The text is central to any act of linguistic communication, the external, objective link
between producer and receiver, whether they are communicating face to face or at a dis-
tance. The diagrams below show in a schematic form the relation between the
user/learner, on whom the Framework is focused, the interlocutor(s), activities and texts.
1.
Production. The user/learner produces a spoken or written text, received, often at a distance, by one
or more listeners or readers, who are not called upon to reply.
1.1.
Speaking
(listener)
USER → sound waves → Listener
(listener)
1.2.
Writing
(reader)
USER → written text → Reader
(reader)
2.
Reception. The user/learner receives a text from one or more speakers or writers, again often at a dis-
tance, and is not called upon to reply.
2.1.
Listening
(speaker)
Speaker → sound waves → USER
(speaker)
2.2.
Reading
(writer)
Writer → written text → USER
(writer)
98

Language use and the language user/learner
3.
Interaction. The user/learner enters into a face-to-face dialogue with an interlocutor. The text of the
dialogue consists of utterances respectively produced and received by each party in alternation.
USER
↔
discourse
↔
Interlocutor
USER
→
Text 1.
→
interlocutor
USER
←
Text 2.
←
interlocutor
USER
→
Text 3.
→
interlocutor
USER
←
Text 4.
←
interlocutor
etc.
4.
Mediation covers two activities.
4.1.
Translation. The user/learner receives a text from a speaker or writer, who is not present, in one
language or code (Lx) and produces a parallel text in a different language or code (Ly) to be received by
another person as listener or reader at a distance.
Writer (Lx) → text (in Lx) → USER → text (in Ly) → Reader (Ly)
4.2.
Interpretation. The user/learner acts as an intermediary in a face-to-face interaction between two
interlocutors who do not share the same language or code, receiving a text in one language (Lx) and
producing a corresponding text in the other (Ly).
Interlocutor (Lx) ↔ discourse (Lx)
↔ USER ↔ discourse (Ly) ↔ Interlocutor (Ly)
Interlocutor (Lx) → Text (Lx1)
→ USER → Text (Ly1)
→ Interlocutor (Ly)
Interlocutor (Lx) ← Text (Lx2)
← USER ← Text (Ly2)
← Interlocutor (Ly)
Interlucutor (Lx) → Text (Lx3)
→ USER → Text (Ly3)
→ Interlocutor (Ly)
Interlocutor (Lx) ← Text (Lx4)
← USER ← Text (Ly4)
← Interlocutor (Ly)
etc.
In addition to interaction and mediation activities as deﬁned above, there are many activ-
ities in which the user/learner is required to produce a textual response to a textual stim-
ulus. The textual stimulus may be an oral question, a set of written instructions (e.g. an
examination rubric), a discursive text, authentic or composed, etc. or some combination
of these. The required textual response may be anything from a single word to a three-
hour essay. Both input and output texts may be spoken or written and in L1 or L2. The
relation between the two texts may be meaning-preserving or not. Accordingly, even if
we overlook the part which may be played in the teaching/learning of modern languages
by activities in which the learner produces an L1 text in response to an L1 stimulus (as
may often be the case with regard to the sociocultural component), some 24 activity types
may be distinguished. For example, the following cases (Table 6) in which both input and
output are in the target language.
Whilst such text-to-text activities have a place in everyday language use, they are par-
ticularly frequent in language learning/teaching and testing. The more mechanical
meaning-preserving activities (repetition, dictation, reading aloud, phonetic transcrip-
tion) are currently out of favour in communication-oriented language teaching owing to
their artiﬁciality and what are seen as undesirable backwash effects. A case can perhaps
be made for them as testing devices for the technical reason that performance depends
99

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Table 6. Text-to-text activities
Input text
Output text
Medium
Language
Medium
Language
Meaning
Activity type
preserving
preserving
(examples)
spoken
L2
spoken
L2
Yes
repetition
spoken
L2
written
L2
Yes
dictation
spoken
L2
spoken
L2
No
oral
question/
answer
spoken
L2
written
L2
No
written
answers to
oral L2
questions
written
L2
spoken
L2
Yes
reading aloud
written
L2
written
L2
Yes
copying,
transcription
written
L2
spoken
L2
No
spoken
response to
written L2
rubric
written
L2
written
L2
No
writing in
response to
written L2
rubric
closely on the ability to use linguistic competences to reduce the information content of
the text. In any case, the advantage of examining all possible combinations of categories
in taxonomic sets is not only that it enables experience to be ordered, but also that it
reveals gaps and suggests new possibilities.
100

5
The user/learner’s competences
In order to carry out the tasks and activities required to deal with the communicative
situations in which they are involved, users and learners draw upon a number of compe-
tences developed in the course of their previous experience. In return, participation in
communicative events (including, of course, those events speciﬁcally designed to
promote language learning) results in the further development of the learner’s compe-
tences, for both immediate and long-term use.
All human competences contribute in one way or another to the language user’s
ability to communicate and may be regarded as aspects of communicative competence.
It may however be useful to distinguish those less closely related to language from lin-
guistic competences more narrowly deﬁned.
5.1
General competences
5.1.1
Declarative knowledge (savoir)
5.1.1.1
Knowledge of the world
Mature human beings have a highly developed and ﬁnely articulated model of the
world and its workings, closely correlated with the vocabulary and grammar of their
mother tongue. Indeed, both develop in relation to each other. The question, ‘What is
that?’ may ask for the name of a newly observed phenomenon or for the meaning (ref-
erent) of a new word. The basic features of this model are fully developed during early
childhood, but it is further developed through education and experience during ado-
lescence and indeed throughout adult life. Communication depends on the congru-
ence of the models of the world and of language which have been internalised by the
persons taking part. One aim of scientiﬁc endeavour is to discover the structure and
workings of the universe and to provide a standardised terminology to describe and
refer to them. Ordinary language has developed in a more organic way and the relation
between the categories of form and meaning varies somewhat from one language to
another, though within fairly narrow limits imposed by the actual nature of reality.
Divergence is wider in the social sphere than in relation to the physical environment,
though there, too, languages differentiate natural phenomena very much in relation
to their signiﬁcance for the life of the community. Second and foreign language teach-
ing is often able to assume that learners have already acquired a knowledge of the
world sufﬁcient for the purpose. This is, however, not by any means always the case (see
2.1.1).
101

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Knowledge of the world (whether it derives from experience, education or from infor-
mation sources, etc.) embraces:
•
The locations, institutions and organisations, persons, objects, events, processes and
operations in different domains as exempliﬁed in Table 5 (section 4.1.2). Of consider-
able importance to the learner of a particular language is factual knowledge concern-
ing the country or countries in which the language is spoken, such as its major
geographical, environmental, demographic, economic and political features.
•
Classes of entities (concrete/abstract, animate/inanimate, etc.) and their properties
and relations (temporo-spatial, associative, analytic, logical, cause/effect, etc.) as set
out, for instance, in Threshold Level 1990, Chapter 6.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what knowledge of the world the language learner will be assumed/required to possess;
•
what new knowledge of the world, particularly in respect of the country in which the
language is spoken the learner will need/be equipped to acquire in the course of language
learning.
5.1.1.2
Sociocultural knowledge
Strictly speaking, knowledge of the society and culture of the community or com-
munities in which a language is spoken is one aspect of knowledge of the world. It is,
however, of sufﬁcient importance to the language learner to merit special attention, es-
pecially since unlike many other aspects of knowledge it is likely to lie outside the
learner’s previous experience and may well be distorted by stereotypes.
The features distinctively characteristic of a particular European society and its
culture may relate, for example, to:
1.
Everyday living, e.g.:
•
food and drink, meal times, table manners;
•
public holidays;
•
working hours and practices;
•
leisure activities (hobbies, sports, reading habits, media).
2.
Living conditions, e.g.:
•
living standards (with regional, class and ethnic variations);
•
housing conditions;
•
welfare arrangements.
3.
Interpersonal relations (including relations of power and solidarity) e.g. with respect to:
•
class structure of society and relations between classes;
•
relations between sexes (gender, intimacy);
•
family structures and relations;
•
relations between generations;
•
relations in work situations;
•
relations between public and police, ofﬁcials, etc.;
102

The user/learner’s competences
•
race and community relations;
•
relations among political and religious groupings.
4.
Values, beliefs and attitudes in relation to such factors as:
•
social class;
•
occupational groups (academic, management, public service, skilled and manual
workforces);
•
wealth (income and inherited);
•
regional cultures;
•
security;
•
institutions;
•
tradition and social change;
•
history, especially iconic historical personages and events;
•
minorities (ethnic, religious);
•
national identity;
•
foreign countries, states, peoples;
•
politics;
•
arts (music, visual arts, literature, drama, popular music and song);
•
religion;
•
humour.
5.
Body language (see section 4.4.5). Knowledge of the conventions governing such beha-
viour form part of the user/learner’s sociocultural competence.
6.
Social conventions, e.g. with regard to giving and receiving hospitality, such as:
•
punctuality;
•
presents;
•
dress;
•
refreshments, drinks, meals;
•
behavioural and conversational conventions and taboos;
•
length of stay;
•
leave-taking.
7.
Ritual behaviour in such areas as:
•
religious observances and rites;
•
birth, marriage, death;
•
audience and spectator behaviour at public performances and ceremonies;
•
celebrations, festivals, dances, discos, etc.
5.1.1.3
Intercultural awareness
Knowledge, awareness and understanding of the relation (similarities and distinctive dif-
ferences) between the ‘world of origin’ and the ‘world of the target community’ produce
an intercultural awareness. It is, of course, important to note that intercultural aware-
ness includes an awareness of regional and social diversity in both worlds. It is also
enriched by awareness of a wider range of cultures than those carried by the learner’s L1
and L2. This wider awareness helps to place both in context. In addition to objective
knowledge, intercultural awareness covers an awareness of how each community
appears from the perspective of the other, often in the form of national stereotypes.
103

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what prior sociocultural experience and knowledge the learner is assumed/required to
have;
•
what new experience and knowledge of social life in his/her community as well as in the
target community the learner will need to acquire in order to meet the requirements of L2
communication;
•
what awareness of the relation between home and target cultures the learner will need so
as to develop an appropriate intercultural competence.
5.1.2
Skills and know-how (savoir-faire)
5.1.2.1
Practical skills and know-how include:
•
Social skills: the ability to act in accordance with the types of convention set out in
5.1.1.2 above and to perform the expected routines, in so far as it is considered appro-
priate for outsiders and particularly foreigners to do so.
•
Living skills: the ability to carry out effectively the routine actions required for daily
life (bathing, dressing, walking, cooking, eating, etc.); maintenance and repair of
household equipment, etc.
•
Vocational and professional skills: the ability to perform specialised actions (mental and
physical) required to carry out the duties of (self-)employment.
•
Leisure skills: the ability to carry out effectively the actions required for leisure acti-
vities, e.g.:
•
arts (painting, sculpture, playing musical instruments, etc.);
•
crafts (knitting, embroidery, weaving, basketry, carpentry, etc.);
•
sports (team games, athletics, jogging, climbing, swimming, etc.);
•
hobbies (photography, gardening, etc.).
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what practical skills and know-how the learner will need/be required to possess in order to
communicate effectively in an area of concern.
5.1.2.2
Intercultural skills and know-how
These include:
•
the ability to bring the culture of origin and the foreign culture into relation with
each other;
•
cultural sensitivity and the ability to identify and use a variety of strategies for
contact with those from other cultures;
104

The user/learner’s competences
•
the capacity to fulﬁl the role of cultural intermediary between one’s own culture and
the foreign culture and to deal effectively with intercultural misunderstanding and
conﬂict situations;
•
the ability to overcome stereotyped relationships.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what cultural intermediary roles and functions the learner will need/be equipped/be
required to fulﬁl;
•
what features of the home and target culture the learner will need/be enabled/required to
distinguish;
•
what provision is expected to be made for the learner to experience the target culture;
•
what opportunities the learner will have of acting as a cultural intermediary.
5.1.3
‘Existential’ competence (savoir-être)
The communicative activity of users/learners is affected not only by their knowledge,
understanding and skills, but also by selfhood factors connected with their individual
personalities, characterised by the attitudes, motivations, values, beliefs, cognitive styles
and personality types which contribute to their personal identity. These include:
1.
attitudes, such as the user/learner’s degree of:
•
openness towards, and interest in, new experiences, other persons, ideas,
peoples, societies and cultures;
•
willingness to relativise one’s own cultural viewpoint and cultural value-system;
•
willingness and ability to distance oneself from conventional attitudes to cul-
tural difference.
2.
motivations:
•
intrinsic/extrinsic;
•
instrumental/integrative;
•
communicative drive, the human need to communicate.
3.
values, e.g. ethical and moral.
4.
beliefs, e.g. religious, ideological, philosophical.
5.
cognitive styles, e.g.:
•
convergent/divergent;
•
holistic/analytic/synthetic.
6.
personality factors, e.g.:
•
loquacity/taciturnity;
•
enterprise/timidity;
•
optimism/pessimism;
•
introversion/extroversion;
•
proactivity/reactivity;
105

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
intropunitive/extrapunitive/impunitive personality (guilt);
•
(freedom from) fear or embarrassment;
•
rigidity/ﬂexibility;
•
open-mindedness/closed-mindedness;
•
spontaneity/self-monitoring;
•
intelligence;
•
meticulousness/carelessness;
•
memorising ability;
•
industry/laziness;
•
ambition/(lack of) ambition;
•
(lack of) self-awareness;
•
(lack of) self-reliance;
•
(lack of) self-conﬁdence;
•
(lack of) self-esteem.
Attitudes and personality factors greatly affect not only the language users’/learners’
roles in communicative acts but also their ability to learn. The development of an ‘inter-
cultural personality’ involving both attitudes and awareness is seen by many as an impor-
tant educational goal in its own right. Important ethical and pedagogic issues are raised,
such as:
•
the extent to which personality development can be an explicit educational objec-
tive;
•
how cultural relativism is to be reconciled with ethical and moral integrity;
•
which personality factors a) facilitate b) impede foreign or second language learning
and acquisition;
•
how learners can be helped to exploit strengths and overcome weaknesses;
•
how the diversity of personalities can be reconciled with the constraints imposed on
and by educational systems.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
whether, and if so which personality features learners will need/be encouraged/equipped/
required to develop/display;
•
whether, and if so in what ways, learner characteristics are taken into account in
provisions for language learning, teaching and assessment.
5.1.4
Ability to learn (savoir-apprendre)
In its most general sense, savoir-apprendre is the ability to observe and participate in new
experiences and to incorporate new knowledge into existing knowledge, modifying the
latter where necessary. Language learning abilities are developed in the course of the
experience of learning. They enable the learner to deal more effectively and indepen-
dently with new language learning challenges, to see what options exist and to make
better use of opportunities. Ability to learn has several components, such as language
106

The user/learner’s competences
and communication awareness; general phonetic skills; study skills; and heuristic
skills.
5.1.4.1
Language and communication awareness
Sensitivity to language and language use, involving knowledge and understanding of the
principles according to which languages are organised and used, enables new experience
to be assimilated into an ordered framework and welcomed as an enrichment. The asso-
ciated new language may then be more readily learnt and used, rather than resisted as
a threat to the learner’s already established linguistic system, which is often believed to
be normal and ‘natural’.
5.1.4.2
General phonetic awareness and skills
Many learners, particularly mature students, will ﬁnd their ability to pronounce new lan-
guages facilitated by:
•
an ability to distinguish and produce unfamiliar sounds and prosodic patterns;
•
an ability to perceive and catenate unfamiliar sound sequences;
•
an ability, as a listener, to resolve (i.e. divide into distinct and signiﬁcant parts) a con-
tinuous stream of sound into a meaningful structured string of phonological ele-
ments;
•
an understanding/mastery of the processes of sound perception and production
applicable to new language learning.
These general phonetic skills are distinct from the ability to pronounce a particular lan-
guage.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what steps if any are taken to develop the learner’s language and communication
awareness;
•
what auditory discrimination and articulatory skills the learner will need/be assumed/
equipped/required to possess.
5.1.4.3
Study skills
These include:
•
ability to make effective use of the learning opportunities created by teaching sit-
uations, e.g.:
•
to maintain attention to the presented information;
•
to grasp the intention of the task set;
•
to co-operate effectively in pair and group work;
•
to make rapid and frequent active use of the language learnt;
•
ability to use available materials for independent learning;
107

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
ability to organise and use materials for self-directed learning;
•
ability to learn effectively (both linguistically and socioculturally) from direct
observation of and participation in communication events by the cultivation of
perceptual, analytical and heuristic skills;
•
awareness of one’s own strengths and weaknesses as a learner;
•
ability to identify one’s own needs and goals;
•
ability to organise one’s own strategies and procedures to pursue these goals, in
accordance with one’s own characteristics and resources.
5.1.4.4
Heuristic skills
These include:
•
the ability of the learner to come to terms with new experience (new language, new
people, new ways of behaving, etc.) and to bring other competences to bear (e.g. by
observing, grasping the signiﬁcance of what is observed, analysing, inferencing,
memorising, etc.) in the speciﬁc learning situation;
•
the ability of the learner (particularly in using target language reference sources) to
ﬁnd, understand and if necessary convey new information;
•
the ability to use new technologies (e.g. by searching for information in databases,
hypertexts, etc.).
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what study skills learners are encouraged/enabled to use and develop;
•
what heuristic abilities learners are encouraged/enabled to use and develop;
•
what provision is made for learners to become increasingly independent in their learning
and use of language.
5.2
Communicative language competences
For the realisation of communicative intentions, users/learners bring to bear their
general capacities as detailed above together with a more speciﬁcally language-related
communicative competence. Communicative competence in this narrower sense has the
following components:
•
linguistic competences;
•
sociolinguistic competences;
•
pragmatic competences.
5.2.1
Linguistic competences
No complete, exhaustive description of any language as a formal system for the expres-
sion of meaning has ever been produced. Language systems are of great complexity and
108

The user/learner’s competences
the language of a large, diversiﬁed, advanced society is never completely mastered by
any of its users. Nor could it be, since every language is in continuous evolution in
response to the exigencies of its use in communication. Most nation states have
attempted to establish a standard form of the language, though never in exhaustive
detail. For its presentation, the model of linguistic description in use for teaching the
corpus is still the same model as was employed for the long-dead classical languages.
This ‘traditional’ model was, however, repudiated over 100 years ago by most profes-
sional linguists, who insisted that languages should be described as they exist in use
rather than as some authority thinks they should be and that the traditional model,
having been developed for languages of a particular type, was inappropriate for the
description of language systems with a very different organisation. However, none of the
many proposals for alternative models has gained general acceptance. Indeed, the pos-
sibility of one universal model of description for all languages has been denied. Recent
work on linguistic universals has not as yet produced results which can be used directly
to facilitate language learning, teaching and assessment. Most descriptive linguists are
now content to codify practice, relating form and meaning, using terminology which
diverges from traditional practice only where it is necessary to deal with phenomena
outside the range of traditional models of description. This is the approach adopted in
Section 4.2. It attempts to identify and classify the main components of linguistic com-
petence deﬁned as knowledge of, and ability to use, the formal resources from which
well-formed, meaningful messages may be assembled and formulated. The scheme that
follows aims only to offer as classiﬁcatory tools some parameters and categories which
may be found useful for the description of linguistic content and as a basis for reﬂec-
tion. Those practitioners who prefer to use a different frame of reference are free, here
as elsewhere, to do so. They should then identify the theory, tradition or practice they
are following. Here, we distinguish:
5.2.1.1
lexical competence;
5.2.1.2
grammatical competence;
5.2.1.3
semantic competence;
5.2.1.4
phonological competence;
5.2.1.5
Orthographic competence;
5.2.1.6
Orthoepic competence.
Progress in the development of a learner’s ability to use linguistic resources can be scaled
and is presented in that form below as appropriate.
109

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
GENERAL LINGUISTIC RANGE
Can exploit a comprehensive and reliable mastery of a very wide range of language to formulate
C2
thoughts precisely, give emphasis, differentiate and eliminate ambiguity . . . No signs of having to
restrict what he/she wants to say.
C1
Can select an appropriate formulation from a broad range of language to express him/herself clearly,
without having to restrict what he/she wants to say.
Can express him/herself clearly and without much sign of having to restrict what he/she wants to say.
B2
Has a sufﬁcient range of language to be able to give clear descriptions, express viewpoints and develop
arguments without much conspicuous searching for words, using some complex sentence forms to do so.
Has a sufﬁcient range of language to describe unpredictable situations, explain the main points in an
idea or problem with reasonable precision and express thoughts on abstract or cultural topics such as
music and ﬁlms.
B1
Has enough language to get by, with sufﬁcient vocabulary to express him/herself with some hesitation
and circumlocutions on topics such as family, hobbies and interests, work, travel, and current events, but
lexical limitations cause repetition and even difﬁculty with formulation at times.
Has a repertoire of basic language which enables him/her to deal with everyday situations with
predictable content, though he/she will generally have to compromise the message and search for words.
Can produce brief everyday expressions in order to satisfy simple needs of a concrete type: personal
A2
details, daily routines, wants and needs, requests for information.
Can use basic sentence patterns and communicate with memorised phrases, groups of a few words and
formulae about themselves and other people, what they do, places, possessions etc.
Has a limited repertoire of short memorised phrases covering predictable survival situations; frequent
breakdowns and misunderstandings occur in non-routine situations.
A1
Has a very basic range of simple expressions about personal details and needs of a concrete type.
5.2.1.1
Lexical competence, knowledge of, and ability to use, the vocabulary of a lan-
guage, consists of lexical elements and grammatical elements.
Lexical elements include:
a)
Fixed expressions, consisting of several words, which are used and learnt as wholes.
Fixed expressions include:
•
sentential formulae, including:
direct exponents of language functions (see section 5.2.3.2) such as greetings, e.g.
How do you do? Good morning! etc.
proverbs, etc. (see section 5.2.2.3)
relict archaisms, e.g. Be off with you!
•
phrasal idioms, often:
semantically opaque, frozen metaphors, e.g.:
He kicked the bucket (i.e. he died).
It’s a long shot (= unlikely to succeed).
110

The user/learner’s competences
He drove hell for leather (i.e. very fast).
intensiﬁers. Their use is often contextually and stylistically restricted, e.g. as white
as snow (= ‘pure’), as against as white as a sheet (= ‘pallid’).
•
ﬁxed frames, learnt and used as unanalysed wholes, into which words or phrases
are inserted to form meaningful sentences, e.g.: ‘Please may I have . . .’.
•
other ﬁxed phrases, such as:
phrasal verbs, e.g. to put up with, to make do (with);
compound prepositions, e.g. in front of.
•
ﬁxed collocations, consisting of words regularly used together, e.g. to make a
speech/mistake.
b)
Single word forms. A particular single word form may have several distinct meanings
(polysemy), e.g. tank, a liquid container or an armoured armed vehicle. Single word
forms include members of the open word classes: noun, verb, adjective, adverb,
though these may include closed lexical sets (e.g. days of the week, months of the
year, weights and measures, etc.). Other lexical sets may also be established for gram-
matical and semantic purposes (see below).
Grammatical elements belong to closed word classes, e.g. (in English):
articles
(a, the)
quantiﬁers
(some, all, many, etc.)
demonstratives
(this, that, these, those)
personal pronouns
(I, we, he, she, it, they, me, you, etc.)
question words and
relatives
(who, what, which, where, how, etc.)
possessives
(my, your, his, her, its, etc.)
prepositions
(in, at, by, with, of, etc.)
auxiliary verbs
(be, do, have, modals)
conjunctions
(and, but, if, although)
particles
(e.g. in German: ja, wohl, aber, doch, etc.)
Illustrative scales are available for the range of vocabulary knowledge, and the ability to
control that knowledge.
111

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
VOCABULARY RANGE
Has a good command of a very broad lexical repertoire including idiomatic expressions and
C2
colloquialisms; shows awareness of connotative levels of meaning.
Has a good command of a broad lexical repertoire allowing gaps to be readily overcome with
C1
circumlocutions; little obvious searching for expressions or avoidance strategies. Good command of
idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms.
Has a good range of vocabulary for matters connected to his/her ﬁeld and most general topics. Can
B2
vary formulation to avoid frequent repetition, but lexical gaps can still cause hesitation and
circumlocution.
Has a sufﬁcient vocabulary to express him/herself with some circumlocutions on most topics pertinent to
B1
his/her everyday life such as family, hobbies and interests, work, travel, and current events.
Has sufﬁcient vocabulary to conduct routine, everyday transactions involving familiar situations and
topics.
A2
Has a sufﬁcient vocabulary for the expression of basic communicative needs.
Has a sufﬁcient vocabulary for coping with simple survival needs.
Has a basic vocabulary repertoire of isolated words and phrases related to particular concrete
A1
situations.
VOCABULARY CONTROL
C2
Consistently correct and appropriate use of vocabulary.
C1
Occasional minor slips, but no signiﬁcant vocabulary errors.
Lexical accuracy is generally high, though some confusion and incorrect word choice does occur without
B2
hindering communication.
Shows good control of elementary vocabulary but major errors still occur when expressing more complex
B1
thoughts or handling unfamiliar topics and situations.
A2
Can control a narrow repertoire dealing with concrete everyday needs.
A1
No descriptor available
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
which lexical elements (ﬁxed expressions and single word forms) the learner will need/be
equipped/be required to recognise and/or use;
•
how they are selected and ordered.
5.2.1.2
Grammatical competence
Grammatical competence may be deﬁned as knowledge of, and ability to use, the gramm-
atical resources of a language.
Formally, the grammar of a language may be seen as the set of principles governing
112

The user/learner’s competences
the assembly of elements into meaningful labelled and bracketed strings (sentences).
Grammatical competence is the ability to understand and express meaning by produc-
ing and recognising well-formed phrases and sentences in accordance with these princi-
ples (as opposed to memorising and reproducing them as ﬁxed formulae). The grammar
of any language in this sense is highly complex and so far deﬁes deﬁnitive or exhaustive
treatment. There are a number of competing theories and models for the organisation
of words into sentences. It is not the function of the Framework to judge between them
or to advocate the use of any one, but rather to encourage users to state which they have
chosen to follow and what consequences their choice has for their practice. Here we limit
ourselves to identifying some parameters and categories which have been widely used in
grammatical description.
The description of grammatical organisation involves the speciﬁcation of:
•
elements, e.g.:
morphs
morphemes-roots and afﬁxes
words
•
categories, e.g.:
number, case, gender
concrete/abstract, countable/uncountable
(in)transitive, active/passive voice
past/present/future tense
progressive, (im)perfect aspect
•
classes, e.g.:
conjugations
declensions
open word classes: nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, closed word
classes (grammatical elements – see section 5.2.1.1)
•
structures, e.g.:
compound and complex words
phrases: (noun phrase, verb phrase, etc.)
clauses: (main, subordinate, co-ordinate)
sentences: (simple, compound, complex)
•
processes (descriptive), e.g.:
nominalisation
afﬁxation
suppletion
gradation
transposition
transformation
•
relations, e.g.:
government
concord
valency
An illustrative scale is available for grammatical accuracy. This scale should be seen in
relation to the scale for general linguistic range shown at the beginning of this section.
It is not considered possible to produce a scale for progression in respect of grammatical
structure which would be applicable across all languages.
113

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
GRAMMATICAL ACCURACY
C2
Maintains consistent grammatical control of complex language, even while attention is otherwise
engaged (e.g. in forward planning, in monitoring others’ reactions).
C1
Consistently maintains a high degree of grammatical accuracy; errors are rare and difﬁcult to
spot.
Good grammatical control; occasional ‘slips’ or non-systematic errors and minor ﬂaws in sentence
structure may still occur, but they are rare and can often be corrected in retrospect.
B2
Shows a relatively high degree of grammatical control. Does not make mistakes which lead to
misunderstanding.
Communicates with reasonable accuracy in familiar contexts; generally good control though with
noticeable mother tongue inﬂuence. Errors occur, but it is clear what he/she is trying to express.
B1
Uses reasonably accurately a repertoire of frequently used ‘routines’ and patterns associated with more
predictable situations.
Uses some simple structures correctly, but still systematically makes basic mistakes – for example tends
A2
to mix up tenses and forget to mark agreement; nevertheless, it is usually clear what he/she is trying to
say.
Shows only limited control of a few simple grammatical structures and sentence patterns in a learnt
A1
repertoire.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
on which theory of grammar they have based their work;
•
which grammatical elements, categories, classes, structures, processes and relations are
learners, etc. equipped/required to handle.
A distinction is traditionally drawn between morphology and syntax.
Morphology deals with the internal organisation of words. Words may be analysed into
morphemes, classed as:
•
roots, or stems;
•
afﬁxes (preﬁxes, sufﬁxes, inﬁxes), including:
word-forming afﬁxes (e.g. re-, un-, -ly, -ness);
inﬂexional afﬁxes (e.g. s, -ed, -ing).
Word-formation:
Words may be classiﬁed into:
•
simple words (root only, e.g. six, tree, break);
•
complex words (root + afﬁxes, e.g. unbrokenly, sixes);
•
compound words (containing more than one root, e.g. sixpence, breakdown, oak-tree,
evening dress).
114

The user/learner’s competences
Morphology also deals with other ways of modifying word forms, e.g.:
•
vowel alteration
(sing/sang/sung, mouse/mice)
•
consonant modiﬁcation
(lend/lent)
•
irregular forms
(bring/brought, catch/caught)
•
suppletion
(go/went)
•
zero forms
(sheep/sheep, cut/cut/cut)
Morphophonology deals with the phonetically conditioned variation of morphemes
(e.g. English s/z/iz in walks, lies, rises; t/d/id in laughed, cried, shouted), and their morph-
ologically conditioned phonetic variation (e.g. i:/e in creep/crept, mean/meant, weep/
wept).
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what morphological elements and processes the learner will need/be equipped/required to
handle.
Syntax deals with the organisation of words into sentences in terms of the categories,
elements, classes, structures, processes and relations involved, often presented in the
form of a set of rules. The syntax of the language of a mature native speaker is highly
complex and largely unconscious. The ability to organise sentences to convey meaning
is a central aspect of communicative competence.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what grammatical elements, categories, classes, structures, processes and relations
learners will need/be equipped/required to handle.
5.2.1.3
Semantic competence
deals with the learner’s awareness and control of the organisation of meaning.
Lexical semantics deals with questions of word meaning, e.g.:
•
relation of word to general context:
reference;
connotation;
exponence of general speciﬁc notions;
•
interlexical relations, such as:
synonymy/antonymy;
hyponymy;
collocation;
part-whole relations;
componential analysis;
translation equivalence.
115

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Grammatical semantics deals with the meaning of grammatical elements, categories,
structures and processes (see section 5.2.1.2).
Pragmatic semantics deals with logical relations such as entailment, presupposition,
implicature, etc.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what kinds of semantic relation learners are equipped/required to build up/demonstrate.
Questions of meaning are of course central to communication and are treated passim in
this Framework (see particularly section 5.1.1.1).
Linguistic competence is treated here in a formal sense. From the point of view of
theoretical or descriptive linguistics, a language is a highly complex symbolic system.
When an attempt is made, as here, to separate out the many different components of com-
municative competence, knowledge (largely unconscious) of and ability to handle formal
structure is legitimately identiﬁable as one of those components. How much, if indeed
any, of this formal analysis should enter into language learning or teaching is a different
matter. The functional/notional approach adopted in the Council of Europe publications
Waystage 1990, Threshold Level 1990 and Vantage Level offers an alternative to the treatment
of linguistic competence in Section 5.2.1–3. Instead of starting from language forms and
their meanings, it starts from a systematic classiﬁcation of communicative functions and
of notions, divided into general and speciﬁc, and secondarily deals with forms, lexical and
grammatical, as their exponents. The approaches are complementary ways of dealing
with the ‘double articulation’ of language. Languages are based on an organisation of
form and an organisation of meaning. The two kinds of organisation cut across each other
in a largely arbitrary fashion. A description based on the organisation of the forms of
expression atomises meaning, and that based on the organisation of meaning atomises
form. Which is to be preferred by the user will depend on the purpose for which the
description is produced. The success of the Threshold Level approach indicates that many
practitioners ﬁnd it more advantageous to go from meaning to form rather than the more
traditional practice of organising progression in purely formal terms. On the other hand,
some may prefer to use a ‘communicative grammar’, as for example, in Un niveau-seuil.
What is clear is that a language learner has to acquire both forms and meanings.
5.2.1.4
Phonological competence
involves a knowledge of, and skill in the perception and production of:
•
the sound-units (phonemes) of the language and their realisation in particular con-
texts (allophones);
•
the phonetic features which distinguish phonemes (distinctive features, e.g. voicing,
rounding, nasality, plosion);
•
the phonetic composition of words (syllable structure, the sequence of phonemes, word
stress, word tones);
•
sentence phonetics (prosody)
•
sentence stress and rhythm
•
intonation;
116

The user/learner’s competences
•
phonetic reduction
•
vowel reduction
•
strong and weak forms
•
assimilation
•
elision.
PHONOLOGICAL CONTROL
C2
As C1
C1
Can vary intonation and place sentence stress correctly in order to express ﬁner shades of meaning.
B2
Has acquired a clear, natural, pronunciation and intonation.
B1
Pronunciation is clearly intelligible even if a foreign accent is sometimes evident and occasional
mispronunciations occur.
A2
Pronunciation is generally clear enough to be understood despite a noticeable foreign accent, but
conversational partners will need to ask for repetition from time to time.
A1
Pronunciation of a very limited repertoire of learnt words and phrases can be understood with some
effort by native speakers used to dealing with speakers of his/her language group.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what new phonological skills are required of the learner;
•
what is the relative importance of sounds and prosody;
•
whether phonetic accuracy and ﬂuency are an early learning objective or developed as a
longer term objective.
5.2.1.5
Orthographic competence
involves a knowledge of and skill in the perception and production of the symbols of
which written texts are composed. The writing systems of all European languages are
based on the alphabetic principle, though those of some other languages follow an id-
eographic (logographic) principle (e.g. Chinese) or a consonantal principle (e.g. Arabic).
For alphabetic systems, learners should know and be able to perceive and produce:
•
the form of letters in printed and cursive forms in both upper and lower case
•
the proper spelling of words, including recognised contracted forms
•
punctuation marks and their conventions of use
•
typographical conventions and varieties of font, etc.
•
logographic signs in common use (e.g. @, &, $, etc.)
5.2.1.6
Orthoepic competence
Conversely, users required to read aloud a prepared text, or to use in speech words ﬁrst
encountered in their written form, need to be able to produce a correct pronunciation
from the written form. This may involve:
117

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
knowledge of spelling conventions
•
ability to consult a dictionary and a knowledge of the conventions used there for the
representation of pronunciation
•
knowledge of the implications of written forms, particularly punctuation marks, for
phrasing and intonation
•
ability to resolve ambiguity (homonyms, syntactic ambiguities, etc.) in the light of
the context
ORTHOGRAPHIC CONTROL
C2
Writing is orthographically free of error.
Layout, paragraphing and punctuation are consistent and helpful.
C1
Spelling is accurate, apart from occasional slips of the pen.
Can produce clearly intelligible continuous writing which follows standard layout and paragraphing
B2
conventions.
Spelling and punctuation are reasonably accurate but may show signs of mother tongue inﬂuence.
Can produce continuous writing which is generally intelligible throughout.
B1
Spelling, punctuation and layout are accurate enough to be followed most of the time.
Can copy short sentences on everyday subjects – e.g. directions how to get somewhere.
A2
Can write with reasonable phonetic accuracy (but not necessarily fully standard spelling) short words
that are in his/her oral vocabulary.
Can copy familiar words and short phrases e.g. simple signs or instructions, names of everyday objects,
A1
names of shops and set phrases used regularly.
Can spell his/her address, nationality and other personal details.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
the orthographic and orthoepic needs of learners in relation to their use of spoken and
written varieties of language, and their need to convert text from spoken to written form
and vice versa.
5.2.2
Sociolinguistic competence
Sociolinguistic competence is concerned with the knowledge and skills required to deal
with the social dimension of language use. As was remarked with regard to sociocultu-
ral competence, since language is a sociocultural phenomenon, much of what is con-
tained in the Framework, particularly in respect of the sociocultural, is of relevance to
sociolinguistic competence. The matters treated here are those speciﬁcally relating to
language use and not dealt with elsewhere: linguistic markers of social relations; polite-
ness conventions; expressions of folk-wisdom; register differences; and dialect and
accent.
118

The user/learner’s competences
5.2.2.1
Linguistic markers of social relations
These are of course widely divergent in different languages and cultures, depending on
such factors as a) relative status, b) closeness of relation, c) register of discourse, etc. The
examples given below for English are not universally applicable and may or may not have
equivalence in other languages.
•
use and choice of greetings:
on arrival, e.g. Hello! Good morning!
introductions, e.g. How do you do?
leave-taking, e.g. Good-bye . . . See you later
•
use and choice of address forms:
frozen, e.g. My Lord, Your Grace
formal, e.g. Sir, Madam, Miss, Dr, Professor (+ surname)
informal, e.g. ﬁrst name only, such as John! Susan!
informal, e.g. no address form
familiar, e.g. dear, darling; (popular) mate, love
peremptory, e.g. surname only, such as Smith! You (there)!
ritual insult, e.g. you stupid idiot! (often affectionate)
•
conventions for turntaking
•
use and choice of expletives (e.g. Dear, dear!, My God!, Bloody Hell!, etc.)
5.2.2.2
Politeness conventions
Politeness conventions provide one of the most important reasons for departing from the
straightforward application of the ‘co-operative principle’ (see section 5.2.3.1). They vary
from one culture to another and are a frequent source of inter-ethnic misunderstanding,
especially when polite expressions are literally interpreted.
1.
‘positive’ politeness, e.g.:
•
showing interest in a person’s well being;
•
sharing experiences and concerns, ‘troubles talk’;
•
expressing admiration, affection, gratitude;
•
offering gifts, promising future favours, hospitality;
2.
‘negative’ politeness, e.g.:
•
avoiding face-threatening behaviour (dogmatism, direct orders, etc.);
•
expressing regret, apologising for face-threatening behaviour (correction, contra-
diction, prohibitions, etc.);
•
using hedges, etc. (e.g. ‘ I think’, tag questions, etc.);
3.
appropriate use of ‘please’, ‘thank you’, etc.;
4.
impoliteness (deliberate ﬂouting of politeness conventions), e.g.:
•
bluntness, frankness;
•
expressing contempt, dislike;
119

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
strong complaint and reprimand;
•
venting anger, impatience;
•
asserting superiority.
5.2.2.3
Expressions of folk wisdom
These ﬁxed formulae, which both incorporate and reinforce common attitudes, make a
signiﬁcant contribution to popular culture. They are frequently used, or perhaps more
often referred to or played upon, for instance in newspaper headlines. A knowledge of
this accumulated folk wisdom, expressed in language assumed to be known to all, is a
signiﬁcant component of the linguistic aspect of sociocultural competence.
•
proverbs, e.g. a stitch in time saves nine
•
idioms, e.g. a sprat to catch a mackerel
•
familiar quotations, e.g. a man’s a man for a’ that
•
expressions of:
belief, such as – weathersaws, e.g. Fine before seven, rain by eleven
attitudes, such as – clichés, e.g. It takes all sorts to make a world
values, e.g. It’s not cricket.
Grafﬁti, T-shirt slogans, TV catch phrases, work-place cards and posters now often have
this function.
5.2.2.4
Register differences
The term ‘register’ is used to refer to systematic differences between varieties of language
used in different contexts. This is a very broad concept, which could cover what is here
dealt with under ‘tasks’ (section 4.3), ‘text-types’ (4.6.4) and ‘macrofunctions’(5.2.3.2). In
this section we deal with differences in level of formality:
•
frozen, e.g. Pray silence for His Worship the Mayor!
•
formal, e.g. May we now come to order, please.
•
neutral, e.g. Shall we begin?
•
informal, e.g. Right. What about making a start?
•
familiar, e.g. O.K. Let’s get going.
•
intimate, e.g. Ready dear?
In early learning (say up to level B1), a relatively neutral register is appropriate, unless
there are compelling reasons otherwise. It is this register that native speakers are likely
to use towards and expect from foreigners and strangers generally. Acquaintance with
more formal or more familiar registers is likely to come over a period of time, perhaps
through the reading of different text-types, particularly novels, at ﬁrst as a receptive com-
petence. Some caution should be exercised in using more formal or more familiar regis-
ters, since their inappropriate use may well lead to misinterpretation and ridicule.
120

The user/learner’s competences
5.2.2.5
Dialect and accent
Sociolinguistic competence also includes the ability to recognise the linguistic markers
of, for example:
•
social class
•
regional provenance
•
national origin
•
ethnicity
•
occupational group
Such markers include:
•
lexicon, e.g. Scottish wee for ‘small’
•
grammar, e.g. Cockney I ain’t seen nothing for ‘I haven’t seen anything’
•
phonology, e.g. New York boid for ‘bird’
•
vocal characteristics (rhythm, loudness, etc.)
•
paralinguistics
•
body language
No European language communities are entirely homogenous. Different regions have
their peculiarities in language and culture. These are usually most marked in those who
live purely local lives and therefore correlate with social class, occupation and educa-
tional level. Recognition of such dialectal features therefore gives signiﬁcant clues as to
the interlocutor’s characteristics. Stereotyping plays a large role in this process. It can be
reduced by the development of intercultural skills (see section 5.1.2.2). Learners will in
the course of time also come into contact with speakers of various provenances. Before
themselves adopting dialect forms they should be aware of their social connotations and
of the need for coherence and consistency.
The scaling of items for aspects of sociolinguistic competence proved problematic (see
Appendix B). Items successfully scaled are shown in the illustrative scale below. As can
be seen, the bottom part of the scale concerns only markers of social relations and polite-
ness conventions. From Level B2, users are then found able to express themselves ade-
quately in language which is sociolinguistically appropriate to the situations and
persons involved, and begin to acquire an ability to cope with variation of speech, plus a
greater degree of control over register and idiom.
121

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
SOCIOLINGUISTIC APPROPRIATENESS
Has a good command of idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms with awareness of connotative levels
of meaning.
Appreciates fully the sociolinguistic and sociocultural implications of language used by native speakers
C2
and can react accordingly.
Can mediate effectively between speakers of the target language and that of his/her community of origin
taking account of sociocultural and sociolinguistic differences.
Can recognise a wide range of idiomatic expressions and colloquialisms, appreciating register shifts;
may, however, need to conﬁrm occasional details, especially if the accent is unfamiliar.
C1
Can follow ﬁlms employing a considerable degree of slang and idiomatic usage.
Can use language ﬂexibly and effectively for social purposes, including emotional, allusive and joking
usage.
Can express him or herself conﬁdently, clearly and politely in a formal or informal register, appropriate
to the situation and person(s) concerned.
Can with some effort keep up with and contribute to group discussions even when speech is fast and
B2
colloquial.
Can sustain relationships with native speakers without unintentionally amusing or irritating them or
requiring them to behave other than they would with a native speaker.
Can express him or herself appropriately in situations and avoid crass errors of formulation.
Can perform and respond to a wide range of language functions, using their most common exponents in
a neutral register.
B1
Is aware of the salient politeness conventions and acts appropriately.
Is aware of, and looks out for signs of, the most signiﬁcant differences between the customs, usages,
attitudes, values and beliefs prevalent in the community concerned and those of his or her own.
Can perform and respond to basic language functions, such as information exchange and requests and
express opinions and attitudes in a simple way.
Can socialise simply but effectively using the simplest common expressions and following basic routines.
A2
Can handle very short social exchanges, using everyday polite forms of greeting and address. Can make
and respond to invitations, suggestions, apologies, etc.
Can establish basic social contact by using the simplest everyday polite forms of: greetings and farewells;
A1
introductions; saying please, thank you, sorry, etc.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what range of greetings, address forms and expletives learners should need/be equipped/be
required to a) recognise b) evaluate sociologically c) use themselves;
•
which politeness conventions learners should need/be equipped/be required to a) recognise
and understand b) use themselves;
•
which forms of impoliteness learners should need/be equipped/be required to a) recognise
and understand b) use themselves and in which situations to do so;
•
which proverbs, clichés and folk idioms learners should need/be equipped/be required to a)
recognise and understand b) use themselves;
•
which registers learners should need/be equipped/be required to a) recognise b) use;
•
which social groups in the target community and, perhaps, in the international community
the learner should need/be equipped/be required to recognise by their use of language.
122

The user/learner’s competences
5.2.3
Pragmatic competences
Pragmatic competences are concerned with the user/learner’s knowledge of the prin-
ciples according to which messages are:
a) organised, structured and arranged (‘discourse competence’);
b) used to perform communicative functions (‘functional competence’);
c)
sequenced according to interactional and transactional schemata (‘design competence’).
5.2.3.1
Discourse competence is the ability of a user/learner to arrange sentences in
sequence so as to produce coherent stretches of language. It includes knowledge of and
ability to control the ordering of sentences in terms of:
•
topic/focus;
•
given/new;
•
‘natural’ sequencing: e.g. temporal:
‘natural’ sequencing: e.g. •
He fell over and I hit him, as against
‘natural’ sequencing: e.g. e.g. •
I hit him and he fell over.
•
cause/effect (invertible) – prices are rising – people want higher wages.
•
ability to structure and manage discourse in terms of:
thematic organisation;
coherence and cohesion;
logical ordering;
style and register;
rhetorical effectiveness;
the ‘co-operative principle’ (Grice 1975): ‘make your contribution such as is required, at
the stage at which it occurs, by the accepted purpose or direction of the talk exchange
in which you are engaged, by observing the following maxims:
•
quality (try to make your contribution one that is true);
•
quantity (make your contribution as informative as necessary, but not more);
•
relevance (do not say what is not relevant);
•
manner (be brief and orderly, avoid obscurity and ambiguity)’.
Departure from these criteria for straightforward and efﬁcient communication should
be for a speciﬁc purpose rather than because of inability to meet them.
•
Text design: knowledge of the design conventions in the community concerning, e.g.:
how information is structured in realising the various macrofunctions (description,
narrative, exposition, etc.);
how stories, anecdotes, jokes, etc. are told;
how a case is built up (in law, debate, etc.);
how written texts (essays, formal letters, etc.) are laid out, signposted and sequenced.
A good deal of mother tongue education is devoted to building a young person’s dis-
course skills. In learning a foreign language, a learner is likely to start with short turns,
usually of single sentence length. At higher levels of proﬁciency, the development of dis-
course competence, the components of which are indicated in the section, becomes of
increasing importance.
123

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Illustrative scales are available for the following aspects of discourse competence:
•
Flexibility to circumstances;
•
Turntaking (also presented under interaction strategies);
•
Thematic development;
•
Coherence and cohesion.
FLEXIBILITY
C2
Shows great ﬂexibility reformulating ideas in differing linguistic forms to give emphasis, to differentiate
according to the situation, interlocutor, etc. and to eliminate ambiguity.
C1
As B2+
Can adjust what he/she says and the means of expressing it to the situation and the recipient and adopt
a level of formality appropriate to the circumstances.
B2
Can adjust to the changes of direction, style and emphasis normally found in conversation.
Can vary formulation of what he/she wants to say.
Can adapt his/her expression to deal with less routine, even difﬁcult, situations.
B1
Can exploit a wide range of simple language ﬂexibly to express much of what he/she wants.
Can adapt well rehearsed memorised simple phrases to particular circumstances through limited lexical
substitution.
A2
Can expand learned phrases through simple recombinations of their elements.
A1
No descriptor available
TURNTAKING
C2
As C1
C1
Can select a suitable phrase from a readily available range of discourse functions to preface his/her
remarks appropriately in order to get the ﬂoor, or to gain time and keep the ﬂoor whilst thinking.
Can intervene appropriately in discussion, exploiting appropriate language to do so.
Can initiate, maintain and end discourse appropriately with effective turntaking.
B2
Can initiate discourse, take his/her turn when appropriate and end conversation when he/she needs to,
though he/she may not always do this elegantly.
Can use stock phrases (e.g. ‘That’s a difﬁcult question to answer’) to gain time and keep the turn whilst
formulating what to say.
Can intervene in a discussion on a familiar topic, using a suitable phrase to get the ﬂoor.
B1
Can initiate, maintain and close simple face-to-face conversation on topics that are familiar or of
personal interest.
Can use simple techniques to start, maintain, or end a short conversation.
Can initiate, maintain and close simple, face-to-face conversation.
A2
Can ask for attention.
A1
No descriptor available
124

The user/learner’s competences
THEMATIC DEVELOPMENT
C2
As C1
Can give elaborate descriptions and narratives, integrating sub-themes, developing particular points
C1
and rounding off with an appropriate conclusion.
Can develop a clear description or narrative, expanding and supporting his/her main points with
B2
relevant supporting detail and examples.
B1
Can reasonably ﬂuently relate a straightforward narrative or description as a linear sequence of points.
A2
Can tell a story or describe something in a simple list of points.
A1
No descriptor available
COHERENCE AND COHESION
C2
Can create coherent and cohesive text making full and appropriate use of a variety of organisational
patterns and a wide range of cohesive devices.
C1
Can produce clear, smoothly ﬂowing, well-structured speech, showing controlled use of organisational
patterns, connectors and cohesive devices.
Can use a variety of linking words efﬁciently to mark clearly the relationships between ideas.
B2
Can use a limited number of cohesive devices to link his/her utterances into clear, coherent discourse,
though there may be some ‘jumpiness’ in a long contribution.
B1
Can link a series of shorter, discrete simple elements into a connected, linear sequence of points.
Can use the most frequently occurring connectors to link simple sentences in order to tell a story or
describe something as a simple list of points.
A2
Can link groups of words with simple connectors like ‘and’, ‘but’ and ‘because’.
A1
Can link words or groups of words with very basic linear connectors like ‘and’ or ‘then’.
5.2.3.2
Functional competence
This component is concerned with the use of spoken discourse and written texts in com-
munication for particular functional purposes (see section 4.2). Conversational compe-
tence is not simply a matter of knowing which particular functions (microfunctions) are
expressed by which language forms. Participants are engaged in an interaction, in which
each initiative leads to a response and moves the interaction further on, according to its
purpose, through a succession of stages from opening exchanges to its ﬁnal conclusion.
Competent speakers have an understanding of the process and skills in operating it. A
macrofunction is characterised by its interactional structure. More complex situations
may well have an internal structure involving sequences of macrofunctions, which in many
cases are ordered according to formal or informal patterns of social interaction (schemata).
1.
Microfunctions are categories for the functional use of single (usually short) utter-
ances, usually as turns in an interaction. Microfunctions are categorised in some detail
(but not exhaustively) in Threshold Level 1990, Chapter 5:
125

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
1.1 imparting and seeking factual information:
•
identifying
•
reporting
•
correcting
•
asking
•
answering
1.2 expressing and ﬁnding out attitudes:
•
factual (agreement/disagreement)
•
knowledge (knowledge/ignorance, remembering, forgetting, probability, cer-
tainty)
•
modality (obligations, necessity, ability, permission)
•
volition (wants, desires, intentions, preference)
•
emotions (pleasure/displeasure, likes/dislikes, satisfaction, interest, surprise,
hope, disappointment, fear, worry, gratitude)
•
moral (apologies, approval, regret, sympathy)
1.3 suasion:
•
suggestions, requests, warnings, advice, encouragement, asking help, invita-
tions, offers
1.4 socialising:
•
attracting attention, addressing, greetings, introductions, toasting, leave-taking
1.5 structuring discourse:
•
(28 microfunctions, opening, turntaking, closing, etc.)
1.6 communication repair
•
(16 microfunctions)
2.
Macrofunctions are categories for the functional use of spoken discourse or written
text consisting of a (sometimes extended) sequence of sentences, e.g.:
•
description
•
narration
•
commentary
•
exposition
•
exegesis
•
explanation
•
demonstration
•
instruction
•
argumentation
•
persuasion
etc.
3.
Interaction schemata
Functional competence also includes knowledge of and ability to use the schemata (pat-
terns of social interaction) which underlie communication, such as verbal exchange pat-
126

The user/learner’s competences
terns. The interactive communicative activities set out in section 4.4.3 involve structured
sequences of actions by the parties in turns. At their simplest, they form pairs such as:
question:
answer
statement:
agreement/disagreement
request/offer/apology:
acceptance/non-acceptance
greeting/toast:
response
Triplets, in which the ﬁrst speaker acknowledges or responds to the interlocutor’s reply,
are common. Pairs and triplets are usually embedded in longer transactions and interac-
tions. For instance, in more complex goal-oriented co-operative transactions, language is
used as necessary to:
•
form the working group and establish relations among participants;
•
establish common knowledge of the relevant features of the current situation and
arrive at a common reading;
•
identify what could and ought to be changed;
•
establish common agreement on goals and on the action required to meet them;
•
agree roles in carrying out the action;
•
manage the practical actions involved by e.g.:
identifying and dealing with problems which arise;
co-ordinating and sequencing contributions;
mutual encouragement;
recognising the achievement of sub-goals;
•
recognise the ﬁnal achievement of the task;
•
evaluate the transaction;
•
complete and terminate the transaction.
The total process can be represented schematically. An example is the general schema
offered for the purchase of goods or services in Threshold Level 1990, Chapter 8:
General Schema for purchase of goods or services
1.
Moving to place of transaction
1.1
Finding the way to the shop, store, supermarket, restaurant, station, hotel, etc.
1.2
Finding the way to the counter, department, table, ticket ofﬁce, reception, etc.
2.
Establishing contact
2.1
Exchanging greetings with the shopkeeper/assistant/waiter/receptionist, etc.
2.1.1
assistant greets
2.1.2
customer greets
3.
Selecting goods/services
3.1
identifying category of goods/services required
3.1.1
seeking information
3.1.2
giving information
3.2
identifying options
3.3
discussing pros and cons of options (e.g. quality, price, colour, size of goods)
3.3.1
seeking information
3.3.2
giving information
127

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
3.3.3
seeking advice
3.3.4
giving advice
3.3.5
asking for preference
3.3.6
expressing preference, etc.
3.4
identifying particular goods required
3.5
examining goods
3.6
agreeing to purchase
4.
Exchanging goods for payment
4.1
agreeing prices of items
4.2
agreeing addition of total
4.3
receiving/handing over payment
4.4
receiving/handing over goods (and receipt)
4.5
exchanging thanks
4.5.1
assistant thanks
4.5.2
customer thanks
5.
Leave-taking
5.1
expressing (mutual) satisfaction
5.1.1
assistant expresses satisfaction
5.1.2
customer expresses satisfaction
5.2
exchanging interpersonal comment (e.g. weather, local gossip)
5.3
exchanging parting greetings
5.3.1
assistant greets
5.3.2
customer greets
NB It should be noted that, as with similar schemata, the availability of this schema to
shoppers and shop assistants does not mean that on every occasion this form is used.
Especially under modern conditions, language is often used more sparingly, particularly
to deal with problems that arise in an otherwise depersonalised and semi-automated
transaction, or to humanise it (see section 4.1.1).
It is not feasible to develop illustrative scales for all the areas of competence implied
when one talks of functional ability. Certain microfunctional activities are in fact scaled
in the illustrative scales for interactive and productive communicative activities.
Two generic qualitative factors which determine the functional success of the learner/
user are:
a)
ﬂuency, the ability to articulate, to keep going, and to cope when one lands in a dead
end
b)
propositional precision, the ability to formulate thoughts and propositions so as to
make one’s meaning clear.
128

The user/learner’s competences
Illustrative scales are available for these two qualitative aspects:
SPOKEN FLUENCY
Can express him/herself at length with a natural, effortless, unhesitating ﬂow. Pauses only to reﬂect on
C2
precisely the right words to express his/her thoughts or to ﬁnd an appropriate example or explanation.
Can express him/herself ﬂuently and spontaneously, almost effortlessly. Only a conceptually difﬁcult
C1
subject can hinder a natural, smooth ﬂow of language.
Can communicate spontaneously, often showing remarkable ﬂuency and ease of expression in even
longer complex stretches of speech.
B2
Can produce stretches of language with a fairly even tempo; although he/she can be hesitant as he/she
searches for patterns and expressions, there are few noticeably long pauses.
Can interact with a degree of ﬂuency and spontaneity that makes regular interaction with native
speakers quite possible without imposing strain on either party.
Can express him/herself with relative ease. Despite some problems with formulation resulting in pauses
and ‘cul-de-sacs’, he/she is able to keep going effectively without help.
B1
Can keep going comprehensibly, even though pausing for grammatical and lexical planning and repair
is very evident, especially in longer stretches of free production.
Can make him/herself understood in short contributions, even though pauses, false starts and
reformulation are very evident.
A2
Can construct phrases on familiar topics with sufﬁcient ease to handle short exchanges, despite very
noticeable hesitation and false starts.
Can manage very short, isolated, mainly pre-packaged utterances, with much pausing to search for
A1
expressions, to articulate less familiar words, and to repair communication.
PROPOSITIONAL PRECISION
Can convey ﬁner shades of meaning precisely by using, with reasonable accuracy, a wide range of
C2
qualifying devices (e.g. adverbs expressing degree, clauses expressing limitations).
Can give emphasis, differentiate and eliminate ambiguity.
Can qualify opinions and statements precisely in relation to degrees of, for example, certainty/
C1
uncertainty, belief/doubt, likelihood, etc.
B2
Can pass on detailed information reliably.
Can explain the main points in an idea or problem with reasonable precision.
B1
Can convey simple, straightforward information of immediate relevance, getting across which point
he/she feels is most important.
Can express the main point he/she wants to make comprehensibly.
Can communicate what he/she wants to say in a simple and direct exchange of limited information on
A2
familiar and routine matters, but in other situations he/she generally has to compromise the message.
A1
No descriptor available
129

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what discourse features the learner is equipped/required to control;
•
which macrofunctions the learner is equipped/required to produce;
•
which microfunctions the learner is equipped/required to produce;
•
what interaction schemata are needed by/required of the learner;
•
which he/she is assumed to control and which are to be taught;
•
according to what principles macro- and microfunctions are selected and ordered;
•
how qualitative progress in the pragmatic component can be characterised.
130

6
Language learning and teaching
In the body of this chapter we ask:
In what ways does the learner come to be able to carry out the tasks, activities and pro-
cesses and build up the competences necessary for communication?
How can teachers, assisted by their various support services, facilitate these processes?
How can education authorities and other decision-makers best plan curricula for
modern languages?
First, however, we should give some further consideration to learning objectives.
6.1
What is it that learners have to learn or acquire?
6.1.1
Statements of the aims and objectives of language learning and teaching should
be based on an appreciation of the needs of learners and of society, on the tasks, activ-
ities and processes that the learners need to carry out in order to satisfy those needs, and
on the competences and strategies they need to develop/build up in order to do so.
Accordingly, Chapters 4 and 5 attempt to set out what a fully competent user of a lan-
guage is able to do and what knowledge, skills and attitudes make these activities pos-
sible. They do as comprehensively as possible since we cannot know which activities will
be of importance to a particular learner. They indicate that, in order to participate with
full effectiveness in communicative events, learners must have learnt or acquired:
•
the necessary competences, as detailed in Chapter 5;
•
the ability to put these competences into action, as detailed in Chapter 4;
•
the ability to employ the strategies necessary to bring the competences into action.
6.1.2
For the purposes of representing or steering the progress of language learners, it
is useful to describe their abilities at a series of successive levels. Such scales have been
offered where appropriate in Chapters 4 and 5. When charting the progress of students
through the earlier stages of their general education, at a time when their future career
needs cannot be foreseen, or indeed whenever an overall assessment has to be made of a
learner’s language proﬁciency, it may be most useful and practical to combine a number
of these categories into a single summary characterisation of language ability, as, for
instance, in Table 1 presented in Chapter 3.
131

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Greater ﬂexibility is afforded by a scheme, such as that in Table 2 in Chapter 3, intended
for the purposes of learner self-assessment, in which the various language activities are
scaled separately, though each again holistically. This presentation allows a proﬁle to be
established in cases where skills development is uneven. Even greater ﬂexibility is of
course provided by the detailed and separate scaling of sub-categories as in Chapters 4 and
5. Whilst all the abilities set out in those chapters have to be deployed by a language user
to deal effectively with the full range of communicative events, not all learners will wish,
or need, to acquire them all in a non-native language. For instance, some learners will
have no requirement for written language. Others may be concerned only with the under-
standing of written texts. However, there is no strict implication that such learners should
conﬁne themselves to the spoken and written forms of the language respectively.
It may be, according to the learner’s cognitive style, that the memorisation of spoken
forms is greatly facilitated by association with the corresponding written forms. Vice
versa, the perception of written forms may be facilitated, or even necessitated, by asso-
ciating them with the corresponding oral utterances. If this is so, the sense modality not
required for use – and consequently not stated as an objective – may nevertheless be
involved in language learning as a means to an end. It is a matter for decision (conscious
or not) which competence, tasks, activities and strategies should be given a role in the
development of a particular learner as objective or means.
It is also not a logical necessity for a competence, task, activity or strategy which is
identiﬁed as an objective as being necessary to the satisfaction of the learner’s commu-
nicative needs, to be included in a learning programme. For instance, much of what is
included as ‘knowledge of the world’ may be assumed as prior knowledge, already within
the learner’s general competence as a result of previous experience of life or instruction
given in the mother tongue. The problem may then be simply ﬁnding the proper expo-
nence in L2 for a notional category in L1. It will be a matter for decision what new knowl-
edge must be learnt and what can be assumed. A problem arises when a particular
conceptual ﬁeld is differently organised in L1 and L2, as is frequently the case, so that
correspondence of word-meanings is partial or inexact. How serious is the mismatch? To
what misunderstandings may it lead? Accordingly, what priority should it be given at a
particular stage of learning? At what level should mastery of the distinction be required
or attended to? Can the problem be left to sort itself out with experience?
Similar issues arise with respect to pronunciation. Many phonemes can be transferred
from L1 to L2 unproblematically. In some cases the sounds used in particular contexts
may be noticeably different. Other phonemes in L2 may not be present in L1. If they are
not acquired or learnt, some loss of information is entailed and misunderstandings may
occur. How frequent and signiﬁcant are they likely to be? What priority should they be
given? Here, the question of the age or the stage of learning at which they are best learnt
is complicated by the fact that habituation is strongest at the phonetic level. To raise pho-
netic errors into consciousness and unlearn the automatised behaviours only once a
close approximation to native norms becomes fully appropriate, may be much more
expensive (in time and effort) than it would have been in the initial phase of learning,
especially at an early age.
Such considerations mean that the appropriate objectives for a particular stage of
learning for a particular learner, or class of learner at a particular age, cannot necessar-
ily be derived by a straightforward across-the-board reading of the scales proposed for
each parameter. Decisions have to be made in each case.
132

Language learning and teaching
6.1.3
Plurilingual competence and pluricultural competence
The fact that the Framework does not conﬁne itself to providing ‘overview’ scaling of
communicative abilities, but breaks down global categories into their components and
provides scaling for them, is of particular importance when considering the develop-
ment of plurilingual and pluricultural competences.
6.1.3.1
An uneven and changing competence
Plurilingual and pluricultural competence is generally uneven in one or more ways:
•
Learners generally attain greater proﬁciency in one language than in the others;
•
The proﬁle of competences in one language is different from that in others (for
example, excellent speaking competence in two languages, but good writing compe-
tence in only one of them);
•
The pluricultural proﬁle differs from the plurilingual proﬁle (for example: good
knowledge of the culture of a community but a poor knowledge of its language, or
poor knowledge of a community whose dominant language is nevertheless well mas-
tered).
Such imbalances are entirely normal. If the concept of plurilingualism and pluricultu-
ralism is extended to take into account the situation of all those who in their native lan-
guage and culture are exposed to different dialects and to the cultural variation inherent
in any complex society, it is clear that here again imbalances (or, if preferred, different
types of balance) are the norm.
This imbalance is also linked to the changing nature of plurilingual and pluricultural
competence. Whereas the traditional view of ‘monolingual’ communicative competence
in the ‘mother tongue’ suggests it is quickly stabilised, a plurilingual and pluricultural
competence presents a transitory proﬁle and a changing conﬁguration. Depending on
the career path, family history, travel experience, reading and hobbies of the individual
in question, signiﬁcant changes take place in his/her linguistic and cultural biography,
altering the forms of imbalance in his/her plurilingualism, and rendering more complex
his/her experience of the plurality of cultures. This does not by any means imply instabil-
ity, uncertainty or lack of balance on the part of the person in question, but rather con-
tributes, in the majority of cases, to improved awareness of identity.
6.1.3.2
Differentiated competence allowing for language switching
Because of this imbalance, one of the features of a plurilingual and pluricultural compe-
tence is that in applying this competence, the individual in question draws upon both
his/her general and language skills and knowledge (see Chapters 4 and 5) in different
ways. For example the strategies used in carrying out tasks involving language use may
vary according to the language in question. Savoir-être (existential competence demon-
strating openness, conviviality and good will (e.g. by the use of gestures, mime, proxem-
ics) may, in the case of a language in which the individual has poorly mastered the
linguistic component, make up for this deﬁciency in the course of interaction with a
native speaker, whereas in a language he or she knows better, this same individual may
133

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
adopt a more distant or reserved attitude. The task may also be redeﬁned, the linguistic
message reshaped or redistributed, according to the resources available for expression or
the individual’s perception of these resources.
A further characteristic of plurilingual and pluricultural competence is that it does
not consist of the simple addition of monolingual competences but permits combina-
tions and alternations of different kinds. It is possible to code switch during the message,
to resort to bilingual forms of speech. A single, richer repertoire of this kind thus allows
choice concerning strategies for task accomplishment, drawing where appropriate on an
interlinguistic variation and language switching.
6.1.3.3
Development of awareness and the process of use and learning
Plurilingual and pluricultural competence also promotes the development of linguistic
and communication awareness, and even metacognitive strategies which enable the
social agent to become more aware of and control his or her own ‘spontaneous’ ways of
handling tasks and in particular their linguistic dimension. In addition, this experience
of plurilingualism and pluriculturalism:
•
exploits pre-existing sociolinguistic and pragmatic competences which in turn develops
them further;
•
leads to a better perception of what is general and what is speciﬁc concerning the lin-
guistic organisation of different languages (form of metalinguistic, interlinguistic or
so to speak ‘hyperlinguistic’ awareness);
•
by its nature reﬁnes knowledge of how to learn and the capacity to enter into rela-
tions with others and new situations.
It may, therefore, to some degree accelerate subsequent learning in the linguistic and
cultural areas. This is the case even if plurilingual and pluricultural competence is
‘uneven’ and if proﬁciency in a particular language remains ‘partial’.
It can be claimed, moreover, that while the knowledge of one foreign language and
culture does not always lead to going beyond what may be ethnocentric in relation to
the ‘native’ language and culture, and may even have the opposite effect (it is not uncom-
mon for the learning of one language and contact with one foreign culture to reinforce
stereotypes and preconceived ideas rather than reduce them), a knowledge of several lan-
guages is more likely to achieve this, while at the same time enriching the potential for
learning.
In this context the promotion of respect for the diversity of languages and of learn-
ing more than one foreign language in school is signiﬁcant. It is not simply a linguis-
tic policy choice at an important point in the history of Europe, for example, nor even
– however important this may be – a matter of increasing future opportunities for
young people competent in more than two languages. It is also a matter of helping
learners:
•
to construct their linguistic and cultural identity through integrating into it a diver-
siﬁed experience of otherness;
•
to develop their ability to learn through this same diversiﬁed experience of relating
to several languages and cultures.
134

Language learning and teaching
6.1.3.4
Partial competence and plurilingual and pluricultural competence
It is in this perspective also that the concept of partial competence in a particular language
is meaningful: it is not a matter of being satisﬁed, for reasons of principle or pragma-
tism, with the development of a limited or compartmentalised mastery of a foreign lan-
guage by a learner, but rather of seeing this proﬁciency, imperfect at a given moment, as
forming part of a plurilingual competence which it enriches. It should also be pointed
out that this ‘partial’ competence, which is part of a multiple competence, is at the same
time a functional competence with respect to a speciﬁc limited objective.
The partial competence in a given language may concern receptive language activities
(for example with the emphasis on oral or written comprehension); it may concern a par-
ticular domain and speciﬁc tasks (for example, to allow a post ofﬁce clerk to give informa-
tion on the most usual post ofﬁce operations to foreign clients speaking a particular
language). But it may also involve general competences (for example non-linguistic knowl-
edge about the characteristics of other languages and cultures and their communities),
so long as there is a functional role to this complementary development of one or other
dimension of the speciﬁed competences. In other words, in the framework of reference
proposed here, the notion of partial competence is to be viewed in relation to the differ-
ent components of the model (see Chapter 3) and variation in objectives.
6.1.4
Variation in objectives in relation to the Framework
Curriculum design in language learning (no doubt even more so than in other disci-
plines and other types of learning) implies choices between kinds and levels of objectives.
The present proposal for a framework of reference takes particular account of this situ-
ation. Each of the major components of the model presented may provide a focus for
learning objectives and become a speciﬁc entry point for the use of the Framework.
6.1.4.1
Types of objectives in relation to the Framework
Teaching/learning objectives may in fact be conceived:
a) In terms of the development of the learner’s general competences (see section 5.1) and
thus be a matter of declarative knowledge (savoir), skills and know-how (savoir-faire), personality
traits, attitudes, etc. (savoir-être) or ability to learn, or more particularly one or other of these
dimensions. In some cases, the learning of a foreign language aims above all at impart-
ing declarative knowledge to the learner (for example, of the grammar or literature or
certain cultural characteristics of the foreign country). In other instances, language
learning will be seen as a way for the learner to develop his or her personality (for
example greater assurance or self-conﬁdence, greater willingness to speak in a group) or
to develop his or her knowledge of how to learn (greater openness to what is new, aware-
ness of otherness, curiosity about the unknown). There is every reason to consider that
these particular objectives relating at any given time to a speciﬁc sector or type of com-
petence, or the development of a partial competence, can in an across-the-board way con-
tribute to the establishment or reinforcement of a plurilingual and pluricultural
competence. In other terms, the pursuit of a partial objective may be part of an overall
learning project.
135

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
b) In terms of the extension and diversiﬁcation of communicative language competence
(see section 5.2) and is then concerned with the linguistic component, or the pragmatic com-
ponent or the sociolinguistic component, or all of these. The main aim of learning a foreign
language may be mastery of the linguistic component of a language (knowledge of its
phonetic system, its vocabulary and syntax) without any concern for sociolinguistic
ﬁnesse or pragmatic effectiveness. In other instances the objective may be primarily of a
pragmatic nature and seek to develop a capacity to act in the foreign language with the
limited linguistic resources available and without any particular concern for the socio-
linguistic aspect. The options are of course never so exclusive as this and harmonious
progress in the different components is generally aimed at, but there is no shortage of
examples, past and present, of a particular concentration on one or other of the compo-
nents of communicative competence. Communicative language competence, considered
as a plurilingual and pluricultural competence, being a whole (i.e. including varieties of
the native language and varieties of one or more foreign languages), it is equally possible
to claim that, at certain times and in certain contexts, the main objective of teaching a
foreign language (even though not made apparent) was reﬁnement of knowledge and
mastery of the native language (e.g. by resorting to translation, work on registers and the
appropriateness of vocabulary in translating into the native language, forms of compar-
ative stylistics and semantics).
c) In terms of the better performance in one or more speciﬁc language activities (see
section 4.4) and is then a matter of reception, production, interaction or mediation. It may be
that the main stated objective of learning a foreign language is to have effective results
in receptive activities (reading or listening) or mediation (translating or interpreting) or
face-to-face interaction. Here again, it goes without saying that such polarisation can
never be total or be pursued independently of any other aim. However, in deﬁning objec-
tives it is possible to attach signiﬁcantly greater importance to one aspect above others,
and this major focus, if it is consistent, will affect the entire process: choice of content
and learning tasks, deciding on and structuring progression and possible remedial
action, selection of type of texts, etc.
It will be seen that generally speaking the notion of partial competence has been primar-
ily introduced and used in respect of some of these choices (e.g. insistence on learning
that emphasises in its objectives receptive activities and written and/or oral comprehen-
sion). But what is proposed here is an extension of this use:
•
on the one hand by intimating that other partial competence-related objectives may
be identiﬁed (as has been referred to in a or b or d) in relation to the reference frame-
work;
•
on the other hand by pointing out that this same reference framework allows for any
so-called ‘partial’ competence to be incorporated within a more general series of com-
municative and learning competences.
d) In terms of optimal functional operation in a given domain (see section 4.1.1) and
thus concerns the public domain, the occupational domain, the educational domain or the
personal domain. The main aim of learning a foreign language may be to perform a job
better, or to help with studies or to facilitate life in a foreign country. As with the other
136

Language learning and teaching
major components of the model proposed, such aims are explicitly reﬂected in course
descriptions, in proposals and requests for language services, and learning/teaching
materials. It is in this area that it has been possible to speak of ‘speciﬁc objectives’, ‘spe-
cialised courses’, ‘vocational language’, ‘preparation for a period of residence abroad’,
‘linguistic reception of migrant workers’. This does not mean that consideration given
to the speciﬁc needs of a particular target group which has to adapt its plurilingual and
pluricultural competence to a particular social ﬁeld of activity must always require an
educational approach appropriate to this aim. But, as with the other components, for-
mulating an objective under this heading and with this focus normally has conse-
quences for other aspects and stages of curriculum design and the provision of teaching
and learning.
It should be noted that this type of objective involving functional adaptation for a
given domain also corresponds to situations of bilingual education, immersion (as
understood by the experiments carried out in Canada) and schooling where the language
of tuition is different from that spoken in the family environment (e.g. an education
exclusively in French in some multilingual former colonies in Africa). From this point of
view, and this is not incompatible with the main thrust of this analysis, these situations
of immersion, whatever the linguistic results they may lead to, are aimed at developing
partial competences: those relating to the educational domain and the acquisition of
knowledge other than linguistic. It will be recalled that in many experiments of total
immersion at a young age in Canada, despite the fact that the language of education was
French, initially no speciﬁc provision was made in the timetable for teaching French to
the English-speaking children concerned.
e) In terms of the enrichment or diversiﬁcation of strategies or in terms of the fulﬁlment
of tasks (see sections 4.5 and Chapter 7) and thus relates to the management of actions
linked to the learning and use of one or more languages, and the discovery or experience
of other cultures.
In many learning experiences it may seem preferable, at one time or another, to focus
attention on the development of strategies that will enable one or other type of task
having a linguistic dimension to be carried out. Accordingly, the objective is to improve
the strategies traditionally used by the learner by rendering them more sophisticated,
more extensive and more conscious, by seeking to adapt them to tasks for which they
had not originally been used. Whether these are communication or learning strategies,
if one takes the view that they enable an individual to mobilise his or her own compe-
tences in order to implement and possibly improve or extend them, it is worthwhile
ensuring that such strategies are indeed cultivated as an objective, even though they may
not form an end in themselves.
Tasks are normally focused within a given domain and considered as objectives to be
achieved in relation to that domain, ﬁtting in with point d above. But there are cases
where the learning objective is limited to the more or less stereotyped carrying out of
certain tasks that may involve limited linguistic elements in one or more foreign lan-
guages: an often quoted example is that of a switchboard operator where the ‘plurilin-
gual’ performance expected, based on a decision taken locally in a given company, is
limited to the production of a few ﬁxed formulations relating to routine operations. Such
137

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
examples are more a case of semi-automated behaviour than partial competences but
there can be no denying that the carrying out of well-deﬁned repetitive tasks in such
cases can also constitute the primary focus of a learning objective.
More generally, formulating objectives in terms of tasks has the advantage, for the
learner too, of identifying in practical terms what the expected results are, and can also
play a short-term motivating role throughout the learning process. To quote a simple
example, telling children that the activity they are about to undertake will enable
them to play ‘Happy Families’ in the foreign language (the objective being the possible
carrying out of a ‘task’) can also be a motivating way of learning the vocabulary for the
various family members (part of the linguistic component of a broader communicative
objective). In this sense, too, the so-called project-based approach, global simulations
and various role-playing games establish what are basically transitory objectives
deﬁned in terms of tasks to be carried out but the major interest of which as far as
learning is concerned resides either in the language resources and activities that such
a task (or sequence of tasks) requires or in the strategies employed or applied. In other
terms, although in the rationale adopted for the conception of the framework of refer-
ence plurilingual and pluricultural competence becomes apparent and is developed
through the carrying out of tasks, in the approach to learning adapted, these tasks are
only presented as apparent objectives or as a step towards the achievement of other
objectives.
6.1.4.2
The complementarity of partial objectives
Deﬁning language teaching/learning objectives in this manner, in terms of the major
components of a general reference model, or of each of the sub-components of these, is
not a mere stylistic exercise. It illustrates the possible diversity of learning aims and the
variety to be found in the provision of teaching. Obviously, a great many types of provi-
sion, in and out of school, cover several of these objectives at the same time. And equally
obviously (but it is worth repeating) pursuing a speciﬁcally designated objective also
means, with respect to the coherence of the model illustrated here, that the achievement
of the stated objective will lead to other results which were not speciﬁcally aimed at or
which were not the main concern.
If, for example, it is presumed that the objective is essentially concerned with a
domain, and is focused on the demands of a given job, for example that of waiter in a res-
taurant, then to achieve this objective language activities will be developed which are
concerned with oral interaction; in relation to communicative competence attention
will be focused on certain lexical ﬁelds of the linguistic component (presentation and
description of dishes, for example), and certain sociolinguistic norms (forms of address
to use with customers, possible request for assistance from a third party, etc.); and there
will no doubt be an insistence on certain aspects of savoir-être (discretion, politeness,
smiling affably, patience, etc.), or on knowledge concerned with the cuisine and eating
habits of the particular foreign culture. It is possible to develop other examples in which
other components would be chosen as the main objective, but this particular example
will no doubt sufﬁce to complete what was said above concerning the concept of partial
competence (see the comments made on the relativisation of what may be understood by
partial knowledge of a language).
138

Language learning and teaching
6.2
The processes of language learning
6.2.1
Acquisition or learning?
The terms ‘language acquisition’ and ‘language learning’ are currently used in a number
of different ways. Many use them interchangeably. Others use one or the other as the
general term, using the other in a more restricted sense. Thus ‘language acquisition’ may
be used either as the general term or conﬁned:
a)
to interpretations of the language of non-native speakers in terms of current
theories of universal grammar (e.g. parameter setting). This work is almost
always a branch of theoretical psycholinguistics of little or no direct concern
to practitioners, especially since grammar is considered to be far removed
from accessibility to consciousness.
b)
to untutored knowledge and ability to use a non-native language resulting
either from direct exposure to text or from direct participation in communi-
cative events.
‘Language learning’ may be used as the general term, or conﬁned to the process whereby
language ability is gained as the result of a planned process, especially by formal study
in an institutional setting.
At the present time it does not seem possible to impose a standardised terminology,
especially since there is no obvious super-ordinate term covering ‘learning’ and ‘acqui-
sition’ in their restricted senses.
Users of the Framework are asked to consider and if possible state in which sense they use the
terms and to avoid using them in ways counter to current speciﬁc usage.
They may also wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
how opportunities for language acquisition in the sense of (b) above can be provided and
exploited.
6.2.2
How do learners learn?
6.2.2.1
There is at present no sufﬁciently strong research-based consensus on how lea-
rners learn for the Framework to base itself on any one learning theory. Some theorists
believe that the human information-processing abilities are strong enough for it to be suf-
ﬁcient for a human being to be exposed to sufﬁcient understandable language for him/her
to acquire the language and be able to use it both for understanding and for production.
They believe the ‘acquisition’ process to be inaccessible to observation or intuition and
that it cannot be facilitated by conscious manipulation, whether by teaching or by study
methods. For them, the most important thing a teacher can do is provide the richest pos-
sible linguistic environment in which learning can take place without formal teaching.
139

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
6.2.2.2
Others believe that in addition to exposure to comprehensible input, active par-
ticipation in communicative interaction is a necessary and sufﬁcient condition for lan-
guage development. They, too, consider that explicit teaching or study of the language
is irrelevant. At the other extreme, some believe that students who have learnt the nec-
essary rules of grammar and learnt a vocabulary will be able to understand and use the
language in the light of their previous experience and common sense without any need
to rehearse. Between these polar extremes, most ‘mainstream’ learners, teachers and
their support services will follow more eclectic practices, recognising that learners do
not necessarily learn what teachers teach and that they require substantial contextual-
ised and intelligible language input as well as opportunities to use the language interac-
tively, but that learning is facilitated, especially under artiﬁcial classroom conditions, by
a combination of conscious learning and sufﬁcient practice to reduce or eliminate the
conscious attention paid to low-level physical skills of speaking and writing as well as to
morphological and syntactic accuracy, thus freeing the mind for higher-level strategies
of communication. Some (many fewer than previously) believe that this aim may be
achieved by drilling to the point of over learning.
6.2.2.3
There is of course considerable variation among learners of different ages, types
and backgrounds as to which of these elements they respond to most fruitfully, and
among teachers, course-writers, etc. as to the balance of elements provided in courses
according to the importance they attach to production vs. reception, accuracy vs. ﬂuency,
etc.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state the assumptions
concerning language learning on which their work is based and their methodological
consequences.
6.3
What can each kind of Framework user do to facilitate language learning?
The language teaching profession forms a ‘partnership for learning’ made up of many
specialists in addition to the teachers and learners most immediately concerned at the
point of learning. This section considers the respective roles of each of the parties.
6.3.1
Those concerned with examinations and qualiﬁcations will have to consider
which learning parameters are relevant to the qualiﬁcations concerned, and the level
required. They will have to make concrete decisions on which particular tasks and
activities to include, which themes to handle, which formulae, idioms and lexical
items to require candidates to recognise or recall, what sociocultural knowledge and
skills to test, etc. They may not need to be concerned with the processes by which the
language proﬁciency tested has been learnt or acquired, except in so far as their own
testing procedures may have a positive or negative ‘wash back’ effect on language
learning.
140

Language learning and teaching
6.3.2
Authorities, when drawing up curricular guidelines or formulating syllabuses,
may concentrate on the speciﬁcation of learning objectives. In doing so, they may specify
only higher-level objectives in terms of tasks, themes, competence, etc. They are not
obliged, though they may wish to do so, to specify in detail the vocabulary, grammar and
functional/notional repertoires which will enable learners to perform the tasks and treat
the themes. They are not obliged, but may wish, to lay down guidelines or make sugges-
tions as to the classroom methods to be employed and the stages through which learn-
ers are expected to progress.
6.3.3
Textbook writers and course designers are not obliged, though they may well
wish to do so, to formulate their objectives in terms of the tasks they wish to equip learn-
ers to perform or the competence and strategies they are to develop. They are obliged to
make concrete, detailed decisions on the selection and ordering of texts, activities, vocab-
ulary and grammar to be presented to the learner. They are expected to provide detailed
instructions for the classroom and/or individual tasks and activities to be undertaken by
learners in response to the material presented. Their products greatly inﬂuence the
learning/teaching process and must inevitably be based on strong assumptions (rarely
stated and often unexamined, even unconscious) as to the nature of the learning process.
6.3.4
Teachers are generally called upon to respect any ofﬁcial guidelines, use text-
books and course materials (which they may or may not be in a position to analyse, eval-
uate, select and supplement), devise and administer tests and prepare pupils and
students for qualifying examinations. They have to make minute-to-minute decisions
about classroom activities, which they can prepare in outline beforehand, but must
adjust ﬂexibly in the light of pupil/student responses. They are expected to monitor the
progress of pupils/students and ﬁnd ways of recognising, analysing and overcoming their
learning problems, as well as developing their individual learning abilities. It is neces-
sary for them to understand learning processes in their great variety, though this under-
standing may well be an unconscious product of experience rather than a clearly
formulated product of theoretical reﬂection, which is the proper contribution to the
partnership for learning to be made by educational researchers and teacher trainers.
6.3.5
Learners are, of course, the persons ultimately concerned with language acquisi-
tion and learning processes. It is they who have to develop the competences and strate-
gies (in so far as they have not already done so) and carry out the tasks, activities and
processes needed to participate effectively in communicative events. However, relatively
few learn proactively, taking initiatives to plan, structure and execute their own learn-
ing processes. Most learn reactively, following the instructions and carrying out the
activities prescribed for them by teachers and by textbooks. However, once teaching
stops, further learning has to be autonomous. Autonomous learning can be promoted if
‘learning to learn’ is regarded as an integral part of language learning, so that learners
become increasingly aware of the way they learn, the options open to them and the
options that best suit them. Even within the given institutional system they can then be
141

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
brought increasingly to make choices in respect of objectives, materials and working
methods in the light of their own needs, motivations, characteristics and resources. We
hope that the Framework, together with the series of specialised user guides, will be of
use not only to teachers and their support services, but also directly to learners in
helping to make them, too, more aware of the options open to them and articulate con-
cerning the choices they make.
6.4
Some methodological options for modern language learning and teaching
Up to this point, the Framework has been concerned with the construction of a compre-
hensive model of language use and the language user, drawing attention along the way
to the relevance of the different components of the model to language learning, teach-
ing and assessment. That relevance has been seen predominantly in terms of the content
and objectives of language learning. These are brieﬂy summarised in sections 6.1 and 6.2.
However, a framework of reference for language learning, teaching and assessment must
also deal with methodology, since its users will undoubtedly wish to reﬂect on and com-
municate their methodological decisions within a general framework. Chapter 6 sets out
to provide such a framework.
It has, of course, to be emphasised that the same criteria apply to this chapter as to
others. The approach to the methodology of learning and teaching has to be comprehen-
sive, presenting all options in an explicit and transparent way and avoiding advocacy or
dogmatism. It has been a fundamental methodological principle of the Council of
Europe that the methods to be employed in language learning, teaching and research are
those considered to be most effective in reaching the objectives agreed in the light of the
needs of the individual learners in their social context. Effectiveness is contingent on the
motivations and characteristics of the learners as well as the nature of the human and
material resources which can be brought into play. Following this fundamental princi-
ple through necessarily results in a great diversity of objectives and an even greater diver-
sity of methods and materials.
There are many ways in which modern languages are currently learnt and taught.
For many years the Council of Europe has promoted an approach based on the com-
municative needs of learners and the use of materials and methods that will enable
learners to satisfy these needs and which are appropriate to their characteristics as
learners. However, as has been made clear in section 2.3.2 and passim, it is not the func-
tion of the Framework to promote one particular language teaching methodology, but
instead to present options. A full exchange of information on these options and of
experience with them must come from the ﬁeld. At this stage it is possible only to indi-
cate some of the options derived from existing practice and to ask users of the
Framework to ﬁll in gaps from their own knowledge and experience. A User Guide is
available.
If there are practitioners who upon reﬂection are convinced that the objectives
appropriate to the learners towards whom they have responsibilities are most effec-
tively pursued by methods other than those advocated elsewhere by the Council of
Europe, then we should like them to say so, to tell us and others of the methods they
use and the objectives they pursue. This might lead to a wider understanding of the
complex diversity of the world of language education, or to lively debate, which is
142

Language learning and teaching
always preferable to simple acceptance of a current orthodoxy merely because it is an
orthodoxy.
6.4.1
General approaches
In general, how are learners expected to learn a second or foreign language (L2)? Is it in
one or more of the following ways?
a)
by direct exposure to authentic use of language in L2 in one or more of the follow-
ing ways:
face to face with native speaker(s);
overhearing conversation;
listening to radio, recordings, etc.;
watching and listening to TV, video, etc.;
reading unmodiﬁed, ungraded, authentic written texts (newspapers, magazines,
stories, novels, public signs and notices, etc.);
using computer programmes, CD ROM, etc.;
participating in computer conferences on- or off-line;
participating in courses in other curriculum subjects which employ L2 as a medium
of instruction;
b)
by direct exposure to specially selected (e.g. graded) spoken utterances and written
texts in L2 (‘intelligible input’);
c)
by direct participation in authentic communicative interaction in L2, e.g. as a con-
versation partner with a competent interlocutor;
d)
by direct participation in specially devised and constructed tasks in L2 (‘comprehen-
sible output’);
e)
autodidactically, by (guided) self-study, pursuing negotiated self-directed objectives
and using available instructional media;
f)
by a combination of presentations, explanations, (drill) exercises and exploitation
activities, but with L1 as the language of classroom management, explanation, etc.;
g)
by a combination of activities as in f), but using L2 only for all classroom purposes;
h)
by some combination of the above activities, starting perhaps with f), but progres-
sively reducing the use of L1 and including more tasks and authentic texts, spoken
and written, and an increasing self-study component;
i)
by combining the above with group and individual planning, implementation and
evaluation of classroom activity with teacher support, negotiating interaction to
satisfy different learner needs, etc.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and state which approaches, in general, they
follow, whether one of the above, or some other.
143

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
6.4.2
Consideration should be given to the relative roles of teachers, learners and media.
6.4.2.1
What different proportions of class time may be (expected to be) spent:
a)
by the teacher expounding, explaining, etc. to the whole class?
b)
in whole-class question/answer sessions (distinguishing between referential, display
and test questions)?
c)
in group or pair working?
d)
in individual working?
6.4.2.2
Teachers should realise that their actions, reﬂecting their attitudes and abilities,
are a most important part of the environment for language learning/acquisition. They
present role-models which students may follow in their future use of the language and
their practice as future teachers. What importance is attached to their:
a)
teaching skills?
b)
classroom management skills?
c)
ability to engage in action research and to reﬂect on experience?
d)
teaching styles?
e)
understanding of and ability to handle testing, assessment and evaluation?
f )
knowledge of and ability to teach sociocultural background information?
g)
inter-cultural attitudes and skills?
h)
knowledge of and ability to develop students’ aesthetic appreciation of literature?
i)
ability to deal with individualisation within classes containing diverse learner types
and abilities?
How are the relevant qualities and abilities best developed?
During individual, pair or group working, should the teacher:
a)
simply supervise and maintain order?
b)
circulate to monitor work?
c)
be available for individual counselling?
d)
adopt the role of supervisor and facilitator, accepting and reacting to students’
remarks on their learning and co-ordinating student activities, in addition to mon-
itoring and counselling?
6.4.2.3
How far should learners be expected or required to:
a)
follow all and only the teacher’s instructions in a disciplined, orderly way, speaking
only when called upon to do so?
b)
participate actively in the learning process in co-operation with the teacher and
other students to reach agreement on objectives and methods, accepting compro-
mise, and engaging in peer teaching and peer assessment so as to progress steadily
towards autonomy?
144

Language learning and teaching
c)
work independently with self-study materials including self-assessment?
d)
compete with each other?
6.4.2.4
What use can and should be made of instructional media (audio and video cas-
settes, computers, etc.)?
a)
none;
b)
for whole-class demonstrations, repetitions, etc.;
c)
in a language/video/computer laboratory mode;
d)
in an individual self-instructional mode;
e)
as a basis for group work (discussion, negotiation, co-operative and competitive
games, etc.);
f)
in international computer networking of schools, classes and individual students.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what are the relative roles and responsibilities of teachers and learners in the
organisation, management, conduct and evaluation of the language-learning process;
•
what use is made of instructional media.
6.4.3
What part should be played by texts in language learning and teaching?
6.4.3.1
How may learners be expected or required to learn from spoken and written
texts (see section 4.6)?
a)
by simple exposure;
b)
by simple exposure, but ensuring that new material is intelligible by inferencing
from verbal context, visual support, etc.;
c)
by exposure, with comprehension monitored and ensured by L2 question and
answer, multiple choice, picture matching, etc.;
d)
as c), but with one or more of the following:
comprehension tests in L1;
explanations in L1;
explanations (including any necessary ad hoc translation), in L2;
systematic pupil/student translation of text into L1;
pre-listening and/or group listening activities, pre-reading activities, etc.
6.4.3.2
How far should the written or spoken texts presented to learners be:
a)
‘authentic’, i.e. produced for communicative purposes with no language teaching
intent, e.g.:
145

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
untreated authentic texts that the learner encounters in the course of direct experi-
ence of the language in use (daily newspapers, magazines, broadcasts, etc.);
authentic texts selected, graded and/or edited so as to be judged appropriate to the
learner’s experience, interests and characteristics.
b)
specially composed for use in language teaching, e.g.:
texts composed to resemble authentic texts as (ii) above (e.g. specially written listen-
ing comprehension materials recorded by actors)
texts composed to give contextualised examples of the linguistic content to be
taught (e.g. in a particular course unit)
isolated sentences for exercise purposes (phonetic, grammatical, etc.)
textbook instruction, explanations etc., test and examination rubrics, teacher’s
classroom language (instructions, explanations, classroom management etc.).
These may be regarded as special text-types. Are they ‘learner-friendly’? What con-
sideration is given to their content, formulation and presentation to ensure that
they are?
6.4.3.3
How far should learners have not only to process, but also to produce texts? These
may be:
a)
spoken:
written texts read aloud;
oral answers to exercise questions;
reproduction of memorised texts (plays, poems, etc.);
pair and group work exercises;
contributions to formal and informal discussion;
free conversation (in class or during pupil exchanges);
presentations.
b)
written:
dictated passages;
written exercises;
essays;
translations;
written reports;
project work;
letters to penfriends;
contributions to class links using fax or e-mail.
6.4.3.4
In receptive, productive and interactive modes, how far may learners be
expected and helped to differentiate text types and to develop different styles of listen-
ing, reading, speaking and writing as appropriate, acting both as individuals and as
members of groups (e.g. by sharing ideas and interpretations in the processes of compre-
hension and formulation)?
146

Language learning and teaching
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state the place of texts
(spoken and written) in their learning/teaching programme and exploitation activities: e.g.
•
according to what principles texts are selected, adapted or composed, ordered and
presented;
•
whether texts are graded;
•
whether learners are a) expected b) helped to differentiate text types and to develop
different listening and reading styles as appropriate to text type and to listen or read in
detail or for gist, for speciﬁc points, etc.
6.4.4
How far should learners be expected or required to learn from tasks and activities
(see sections 4.3 and 4.4):
a)
by simple participation in spontaneous activities?
b)
by simple participation in tasks and activities planned as to type, goals, input, out-
comes, participant roles and activities, etc.?
c)
by participation not only in the task but in pre-planning as well as post-mortem anal-
ysis and evaluation?
d)
as c) but also with explicit awareness-raising as to goals, the nature and structure of
tasks, requirements of participant roles, etc.?
6.4.5
Should the development of the learner’s ability to use communicative strategies (see
section 4.4) be:
a)
assumed to be transferable from the learner’s L1 usage or facilitated;
b)
by creating situation and setting tasks (e.g. role play and simulations) which require
the operation of planning, execution, evaluation and repair strategies;
c)
as b), but using awareness-raising techniques (e.g. recording and analysis of roleplays
and simulations);
d)
as b), but encouraging or requiring learners to focus on and follow explicit strategic
procedures as the need arises.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state the place of
activities, tasks and strategies in their language learning/teaching programme.
6.4.6
General competences (see section 5.1) may be developed in various ways.
6.4.6.1
With regard to knowledge of the world, learning a new language does not
mean starting afresh. Much if not most of the knowledge that is needed can be taken
for granted. However, it is not simply a question of learning new words for old ideas,
though it is remarkable to what extent the framework of general and speciﬁc notions
proposed in the Threshold Level has proved appropriate and adequate for twenty
147

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
European languages, even from different language families. Judgement is needed in
deciding such questions as: Does the language to be taught or tested involve a knowl-
edge of the world which in fact is beyond the learners’ state of maturation, or outside
their adult experience? If so, it cannot be taken for granted. The problem should not be
avoided; in the case of the use of a non-native language as the medium of instruction in
schools or universities (and indeed in mother tongue education itself) both the subject
content and the language used are new. In the past many language textbooks, such as
the Orbis pictus of the celebrated 17th century Czech educationist Comenius, have
attempted to structure language learning in a way explicitly designed to give young
people a structured world-view.
6.4.6.2
The position with regard to sociocultural knowledge and intercultural skills
development is somewhat different. In some respects European peoples appear to share
a common culture. In other respects there is considerable diversity, not simply between
one nation and another but also between regions, classes, ethnic communities, genders
and so on. Careful consideration has to be given to the representation of the target
culture and the choice of the social group or groups to be focused on. Is there any place
for the picturesque, generally archaic, folkloristic stereotypes of the sort found in chil-
dren’s picture books (Dutch clogs and windmills, English thatched cottages with roses
round the door)? They capture the imagination and can be motivating particularly for
younger children. They often correspond in some ways to the self-image of the country
concerned and are preserved and promoted in festivals. If so, they can be presented in
that light. They bear very little relation to the everyday lives of the vast majority of the
population. A balance has to be struck in the light of the over-arching educational goal
of developing the learners’ pluricultural competence.
6.4.6.3
How then should the general, non-language-speciﬁc competences be treated in
language courses?
a)
assumed to exist already, or be developed elsewhere (e.g. in other curricular subjects
conducted in L1) sufﬁciently to be taken for granted in L2 teaching;
b)
treated ad hoc as and when problems arise;
c)
by selecting or constructing texts that illustrate new areas and items of knowledge
d) by special courses or textbooks dealing with area studies (Landeskunde, civilisation,
etc.) i) in L1, ii) in L2;
e)
through an intercultural component designed to raise awareness of the relevant
experiential, cognitive and sociocultural backgrounds of learners and native speak-
ers respectively;
f)
through role-play and simulations;
g)
through subject teaching using L2 as the medium of instruction;
h)
through direct contact with native speakers and authentic texts.
6.4.6.4
With regard to existential competence, the learner’s personality features, motiva-
tions, attitudes, beliefs, etc. (see section 5.1.3) may be:
148

Language learning and teaching
a)
ignored as the learner’s personal concern
b)
taken into account in planning and monitoring the learning process
c)
included as an objective of the learning programme
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state
•
which of the above (or other) means they use to develop general competences;
•
what differences arise if practical skills are a) talked about as themes, b) exercised,
c) demonstrated through actions accompanied by language or d) taught using the target
language as the medium of instruction.
6.4.6.5
With regard to ability to learn, learners may (be expected/required to) develop
their study skills and heuristic skills and their acceptance of responsibility for their own learn-
ing (see section 5.1.4):
a)
simply as ‘spin-off’ from language learning and teaching, without any special plan-
ning or provision;
b)
by progressively transferring responsibility for learning from the teacher to the
pupils/students and encouraging them to reﬂect on their learning and to share this
experience with other learners;
c)
by systematically raising the learners’ awareness of the learning/teaching processes
in which they are participating;
d)
by engaging learners as participants in experimentation with different methodolog-
ical options;
e)
by getting learners to recognise their own cognitive style and to develop their own
learning strategies accordingly.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state the steps they take
to promote the development of pupils/students as responsibly independent language learners
and users.
6.4.7
The development of the learner’s linguistic competences is a central, indispensable
aspect of language learning. How may it best be facilitated in relation to vocabulary,
grammar, pronunciation and orthography?
6.4.7.1
In which of the following ways should learners be expected or required to
develop their vocabulary?
a)
by simple exposure to words and ﬁxed expressions used in authentic spoken and
written texts?
b)
by learner elicitation or dictionary, etc. look-up as needed for speciﬁc tasks and activ-
ities?
149

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
c)
through inclusion in context, e.g. in course-book texts and subsequent recycling in
exercises, exploitation activities, etc.?
d)
by presenting words accompanied by visuals (pictures, gestures and miming, demon-
strative actions, realia, etc.)?
e)
by the memorisation of word-lists, etc. with translation equivalents?
f )
by exploring semantic ﬁelds and constructing ‘mind-maps’, etc.?
g)
by training in the use of monolingual and bilingual dictionaries, thesauruses and
other works of reference?
h)
by explanation and training in the application of lexical structure (e.g. word forma-
tion, compounding, collocations, phrasal verbs, idioms, etc.)?
i)
by a more or less systematic study of the different distribution of semantic features
in L1 and L2 (contrastive semantics)?
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state the ways in which
vocabulary items (form and meaning) are presented to and learned by pupils and students.
6.4.7.2
Size, range and control of vocabulary are major parameters of language acqui-
sition and hence for the assessment of a learner’s language proﬁciency and for the plan-
ning of language learning and teaching.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
what size of vocabulary (i.e. the number of words and ﬁxed expressions) the learner will
need/be equipped/be required to control;
•
what range of vocabulary (i.e. the domains, themes etc. covered) the learner will need/be
equipped/be required to control;
•
what control over vocabulary the learner will need/be equipped/be required to exert;
•
what distinction, if any, is made between learning for recognition and understanding,
and learning for recall and productive use?;
•
what use is made of inferencing techniques? How is their development promoted?
6.4.7.3
Lexical selection
Constructors of testing and textbook materials are obliged to choose which words to
include. Curriculum and syllabus designers are not obliged to do so, but may wish to
provide guidelines in the interests of transparency and coherence in educational provi-
sion. There are a number of options:
•
to select key words and phrases a) in thematic areas required for the achievement of
communicative tasks relevant to learner needs, b) which embody cultural difference
and/or signiﬁcant values and beliefs shared by the social group(s) whose language is
being learnt;
150

Language learning and teaching
•
to follow lexico-statistical principles selecting the highest frequency words in large
general word-counts or those undertaken for restricted thematic areas;
•
to select (authentic) spoken and written texts and learn/teach whatever words they
contain;
•
not to pre-plan vocabulary development, but to allow it to develop organically in
response to learner demand when engaged in communicative tasks.
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
according to which principle(s) lexical selection has been made.
6.4.7.4
Grammatical competence, the ability to organise sentences to convey meaning,
is clearly central to communicative competence and most (though not all) of those
concerned with language planning, teaching and testing pay close attention to the man-
agement of the process of learning to do so. This usually involves a selection, ordering
and step-by-step presentation and drilling of new material, starting with short sentences
consisting of a single clause with its constituent phrases represented by single words
(e.g. Jane is happy) and ﬁnishing with multiclause complex sentences – their number,
length and structure being of course unbounded. This does not preclude the early intro-
duction of analytically complex material as a ﬁxed formula (i.e. a vocabulary item) or as
a ﬁxed frame for lexical insertion (please may I have a . . .), or as the globally learnt words
of a song (In Dublin’s fair city, where the girls are so pretty, I ﬁrst set my eyes on sweet Molly
Malone, as she wheeled her wheelbarrow through streets broad and narrow, crying ‘Cockles and
Mussels alive alive-oh’).
6.4.7.5
Inherent complexity is not the only ordering principle to be considered.
1.
The communicative yield of grammatical categories has to be taken into account, i.e.
their role as exponents of general notions. For instance, should learners follow a pro-
gression which leaves them unable, after two years’ study, to speak of past experi-
ence?
2.
Contrastive factors are of great importance in assessing learning load and hence
cost-effectiveness of competing orderings. For instance, subordinate clauses in
German involve greater word-order problems for English and French learners than
for Dutch learners. However, speakers of closely-related languages, e.g. Dutch/
German, Czech/Slovak, may be prone to fall into mechanical word-for-word trans-
lation.
3.
Authentic discourse and written texts may to some extent be graded for grammati-
cal difﬁculty, but are likely to present a learner with new structures and perhaps cat-
egories, which adept learners may well acquire for active use before others
nominally more basic.
4.
The ‘natural’ acquisition order observed in L1 child language development might
also perhaps be taken into account in planning L2 development.
151

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
The Framework cannot replace reference grammars or provide a strict ordering (though
scaling may involve selection and hence some ordering in global terms) but provides a
framework for the decisions of practitioners to be made known.
6.4.7.6
The sentence is generally regarded as the domain of grammatical description.
However, some intersentential relations (e.g. anaphora: pronoun and pro-verb usage and
the use of sentence adverbs) may be treated as part of linguistic rather than pragmatic
competence (e.g. We didn’t expect John to fail. However, he did).
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
the basis on which grammatical elements, categories, structures, processes and relations
are selected and ordered;
•
how their meaning is conveyed to learners;
•
the role of contrastive grammar in language teaching and learning;
•
the relative importance attached to range, ﬂuency and accuracy in relation to the
grammatical construction of sentences;
•
the extent to which learners are to be made aware of the grammar of (a) the mother
tongue (b) the target language (c) their contrastive relations.
6.4.7.7
Learners may (be expected/required to) develop their grammatical competence:
a)
inductively, by exposure to new grammatical material in authentic texts as
encountered;
b)
inductively, by incorporating new grammatical elements, categories, classes,
structures, rules, etc. in texts specially composed to demonstrate their form, fu-
nction and meaning;
c)
as b), but followed by explanations and formal exercises;
d)
by the presentation of formal paradigms, tables of forms, etc. followed by explana-
tions using an appropriate metalanguage in L2 or L1 and formal exercises;
e)
by elicitation and, where necessary, reformulation of learners’ hypotheses, etc.
6.4.7.8
If formal exercises are used, some or all of the following types may be employed:
a)
gap-ﬁlling
b)
sentence construction on a given model
c)
multiple choice
d)
category substitution exercises (e.g. singular/plural, present/past, active/passive, etc.)
e)
sentence merging (e.g. relativisation, adverbial and noun clauses, etc.)
f)
translation of example sentences from L1 to L2
g)
question and answer involving use of particular structures
h)
grammar-focused ﬂuency exercises
152

Language learning and teaching
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
how grammatical structure is a) analysed, ordered and presented to learners and (b)
mastered by them.
•
how and according to what principles lexical, grammatical and pragmatic meaning in L2
is conveyed to/elicited from learners, e.g.:
•
by translation from/into L1
•
by L2 deﬁnition, explanation, etc.
•
by induction from context.
6.4.7.9
Pronunciation
How should learners be expected/required to develop their ability to pronounce a
language?
a)
simply by exposure to authentic spoken utterances;
b)
by chorused imitation of i)ii
the teacher;
ii)i
audio-recorded native speakers;
iii)
video-recorded native speakers;
c)
by individualised language laboratory work;
d)
by reading aloud phonetically weighted textual material;
e)
by ear-training and phonetic drilling;
f)
as d) and e) but with the use of phonetically transcribed texts;
g)
by explicit phonetic training (see section 5.2.1.4);
h)
by learning orthoepic conventions (i.e. how to pronounce written forms);
i)
by some combination of the above.
6.4.7.10
Orthography
How should learners be expected/required to develop their ability to handle the writing
system of a language?
a)
by simple transfer from L1;
b)
by exposure to authentic written texts:
i)ii
printed
ii)i
typewritten
iii)
handwritten
c)
by memorisation of the alphabet concerned with associated phonetic values (e.g.
Roman, Cyrillic or Greek script where another is used for L1), together with diacrit-
ics and punctuation marks;
d)
by practising cursive writing (including Cyrillic or ‘Gothic’ scripts, etc.) and noting
the characteristic national handwriting conventions;
e)
by memorising word-forms (individually or by applying spelling conventions) and
punctuation conventions;
f)
by the practice of dictation.
153

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state how the phonetic
and orthographic forms of words, sentences, etc. are conveyed to and mastered by learners.
6.4.8
Should the development of the learner’s sociolinguistic competence (see section
5.2.2) be assumed to be transferable from the learner’s experience of social life or faci-
litated:
a)
by exposure to authentic language used appropriately in its social setting?
b)
by selecting or constructing texts that exemplify sociolinguistic contrasts between
the society of origin and the target society?
c)
by drawing attention to sociolinguistic contrasts as they are encountered, explain-
ing and discussing them?
d)
by waiting for errors to be made, then marking, analysing and explaining them and
giving the correct usage?
e)
as part of the explicit teaching of a sociocultural component in the study of a
modern language?
6.4.9
Should the development of the learner’s pragmatic competences (see section 5.2.3)
be:
a)
assumed to be transferable from education and general experience in the mother
tongue (L1)?
or facilitated:
b)
by progressively increasing the complexity of discourse structure and the functional
range of the texts presented to the learner?
c)
by requiring the learner to produce texts of increasing complexity by translating
texts of increasing complexity from L1 to L2?
d)
by setting tasks that require a wider functional range and adherence to verbal
exchange patterns?
e)
by awareness-raising (analysis, explanation, terminology, etc.) in addition to practi-
cal activities?
f)
by explicit teaching and exercising of functions, verbal exchange patterns and dis-
course structure?
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
to what extent sociolinguistic and pragmatic competences can be assumed or left to
develop naturally;
•
what methods and techniques should be employed to facilitate their development where it
is felt to be necessary or advisable to do so.
154

Language learning and teaching
6.5
Errors and mistakes
Errors are due to an ‘interlanguage’, a simpliﬁed or distorted representation of the target
competence. When the learner makes errors, his performance truly accords with his
competence, which has developed characteristics different from those of L2 norms.
Mistakes, on the other hand, occur in performance when a user/learner (as might be the
case with a native speaker) does not bring his competences properly into action.
6.5.1
Different attitudes may be taken to learner errors, e.g.:
a)
errors and mistakes are evidence of failure to learn;
b)
errors and mistakes are evidence of inefﬁcient teaching;
c)
errors and mistakes are evidence of the learner’s willingness to communicate
despite risks;
d)
errors are an inevitable, transient product of the learner’s developing interlanguage.
e)
Mistakes are inevitable in all language use, including that of native speakers.
6.5.2
The action to be taken with regard to learner mistakes and errors may be:
a)
all errors and mistakes should be immediately corrected by the teacher;
b)
immediate peer-correction should be systematically encouraged to eradicate errors;
c)
all errors should be noted and corrected at a time when doing so does not interfere
with communication (e.g. by separating the development of accuracy from the devel-
opment of ﬂuency);
d)
errors should not be simply corrected, but also analysed and explained at an appro-
priate time;
e)
mistakes which are mere slips should be passed over, but systematic errors should be
eradicated;
f )
errors should be corrected only when they interfere with communication;
g)
errors should be accepted as ‘transitional interlanguage’ and ignored.
6.5.3
What use is made of the observation and analysis of learner errors:
a)
in planning future learning and teaching on an individual or group basis?
b)
in course planning and materials development?
c)
in the evaluation and assessment of learning and teaching, e.g.
are students assessed primarily in terms of their errors and mistakes in performing
the tasks set?
if not, what other criteria of linguistic achievement are employed?
are errors and mistakes weighted and if so according to what criteria?
what relative importance is attached to errors and mistakes in:
pronunciation
spelling
155

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
vocabulary
morphology
syntax
usage
sociocultural content?
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state their attitude to
and action in response to learner errors and mistakes and whether the same or different
criteria apply to:
•
phonetic errors and mistakes;
•
orthographic errors and mistakes;
•
vocabulary errors and mistakes;
•
morphological errors and mistakes;
•
syntactic errors and mistakes;
•
sociolinguistic and sociocultural errors and mistakes;
•
pragmatic errors and mistakes.
156

7
Tasks and their role in language teaching
7.1
Task description
Tasks are a feature of everyday life in the personal, public, educational or occupational
domains. Task accomplishment by an individual involves the strategic activation of
speciﬁc competences in order to carry out a set of purposeful actions in a particular
domain with a clearly deﬁned goal and a speciﬁc outcome (see section 4.1). Tasks can be
extremely varied in nature, and may involve language activities to a greater or lesser
extent, for example: creative (painting, story writing), skills based (repairing or assem-
bling something), problem solving (jigsaw, crossword), routine transactions, interpreting
a role in a play, taking part in a discussion, giving a presentation, planning a course of
action, reading and replying to (an e-mail) message, etc. A task may be quite simple or
extremely complex (e.g. studying a number of related diagrams and instructions and
assembling an unfamiliar and intricate apparatus). A particular task may involve a
greater or lesser number of steps or embedded sub-tasks and consequently the boundar-
ies of any one task may be difﬁcult to deﬁne.
Communication is an integral part of tasks where participants engage in interaction,
production, reception or mediation, or a combination of two or more of these, for
example: interacting with a public service ofﬁcial and completing a form; reading a
report and discussing it with colleagues in order to arrive at a decision on a course of
action; following written instructions while assembling something, and if an
observer/helper is present, asking for help or describing/commenting on the process; pre-
paring (in written form) and delivering a public lecture, interpreting informally for a
visitor, etc.
Similar kinds of tasks are a central unit in many syllabuses, textbooks, classroom
learning experiences and tests, although often in a modiﬁed form for learning or testing
purposes. These ‘real-life’, ‘target’ or ‘rehearsal’ tasks are chosen on the basis of learners’
needs outside the classroom, whether in the personal and public domains, or related to
more speciﬁc occupational or educational needs.
Other kinds of classroom tasks are speciﬁcally ‘pedagogic’ in nature and have their
basis in the social and interactive nature and immediacy of the classroom situation
where learners engage in a ‘willing suspension of disbelief’ and accept the use of the
target language rather than the easier and more natural mother tongue to carry out
meaning-focused tasks. These pedagogic tasks are only indirectly related to real-life tasks
and learner needs, and aim to develop communicative competence based on what is
believed or known about learning processes in general and language acquisition in par-
ticular. Communicative pedagogic tasks (as opposed to exercises focusing speciﬁcally on
157

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
decontextualised practice of forms) aim to actively involve learners in meaningful com-
munication, are relevant (here and now in the formal learning context), are challenging
but feasible (with task manipulation where appropriate), and have identiﬁable (and pos-
sibly less immediately evident) outcomes. Such tasks may involve ‘metacommunicative’
(sub)tasks, i.e. communication around task implementation and the language used in
carrying out the task. This includes learner contributions to task selection, manage-
ment, and evaluation, which in a language learning context may often become integral
parts of the tasks themselves.
Classroom tasks, whether reﬂecting ‘real-life’ use or essentially ‘pedagogic’ in nature,
are communicative to the extent that they require learners to comprehend, negotiate and
express meaning in order to achieve a communicative goal. The emphasis in a communi-
cative task is on successful task completion and consequently the primary focus is on
meaning as learners realise their communicative intentions. However, in the case of tasks
designed for language learning or teaching purposes, performance is concerned both with
meaning and the way meanings are comprehended, expressed and negotiated. A changing
balance needs to be established between attention to meaning and form, ﬂuency and accu-
racy, in the overall selection and sequencing of tasks so that both task performance and
language learning progress can be facilitated and appropriately acknowledged.
7.2
Task performance
In considering task performance in pedagogical contexts it is necessary to take into
account both the learner’s competences and the conditions and constraints speciﬁc to a
particular task (which may be manipulated in order to modify the level of difﬁculty of
classroom tasks), and the strategic interplay of learner competences and task parameters
in carrying out a task.
7.2.1
Competences
Tasks of any kind require the activation of a range of appropriate general competences,
for example: knowledge and experience of the world; sociocultural knowledge (concern-
ing life in the target community and essential differences between practices, values and
beliefs in that community and the learner’s own society); skills such as intercultural
skills (mediating between the two cultures), learning skills, and everyday practical skills
and know-how (see section 5.1). In order to accomplish a communicative task, whether
in a real-life or a learning/examination setting, the language user or learner draws also
on communicative language competences (linguistic, sociolinguistic and pragmatic
knowledge and skills – see section 5.2). In addition, individual personality and attitudi-
nal characteristics affect the user or learner’s task performance.
Successful task accomplishment may be facilitated by the prior activation of the
learner’s competences, for example, in the initial problem-posing or goal-setting phase
of a task by providing or raising awareness of necessary linguistic elements, by drawing
on prior knowledge and experience to activate appropriate schemata, and by encourag-
ing task planning or rehearsal. In this way the processing load during task execution and
monitoring is reduced and the learner’s attention is freer to deal with any unexpected
158

Tasks and their role in language teaching
content and/or form-related problems that may arise, thereby increasing the likelihood
of successful task completion in both quantitative and qualitative terms.
7.2.2
Conditions and constraints
In addition to user/learner competences and characteristics, performance is affected by
certain task-related conditions and constraints which can vary from task to task, and the
teacher or textbook writer can control a number of elements in order to adjust the level
of task difﬁculty upwards or downwards.
Comprehension tasks may be designed so that the same input may be available to all
learners but different outcomes may be envisaged quantitatively (amount of information
required) or qualitatively (standard of performance expected). Alternatively, the input
text may contain differing amounts of information or degrees of cognitive and/or organ-
isational complexity, or different amounts of support (visuals, key words, prompts,
charts, diagrams, etc.) may be made available to help learners. Input may be chosen for
its relevance to the learner (motivation) or for reasons extrinsic to the learner. A text may
be listened to or read as often as necessary or limits may be imposed. The type of response
required can be quite simple (raise your hand) or demanding (create a new text). In the
case of interaction and production tasks, performance conditions can be manipulated in
order to make a task more or less demanding, for example by varying: the amount of time
allowed for planning and for realisation; the duration of the interaction or production;
the degree of (un)predictability, amount and kind of support provided, etc.
7.2.3
Strategies
Task performance is a complex process, therefore, involving the strategic interplay of a
range of learner competences and task-related factors. In responding to the demands of a
task the language user or learner activates those general and communicative strategies
which are most efﬁcient for accomplishing the particular task. The user or learner natu-
rally adapts, adjusts and ﬁlters task inputs, goals, conditions and constraints to ﬁt his or
her own resources, purposes and (in a language learning context) particular learning style.
In carrying out a communication task, an individual selects, balances, activates and
co-ordinates the appropriate components of those competences necessary for task plan-
ning, execution, monitoring/evaluation, and (where necessary) repair, with a view to the
effective achievement of his or her intended communicative purpose. Strategies (general
and communicative) provide a vital link between the different competences that the
learner has (innate or acquired) and successful task completion (see sections 4.4 and 4.5).
7.3
Task difﬁculty
Individuals may differ considerably in their approach to the same task. Consequently the
difﬁculty of any particular task for an individual, and the strategies which he or she
adopts to cope with the demands of the task, are the result of a number of interrelated
factors arising from his or her competences (general and communicative) and individual
159

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
characteristics, and the speciﬁc conditions and constraints under which the task is
carried out. For these reasons the ease or difﬁculty of tasks cannot be predicted with cer-
tainty, least of all for individual learners, and in language learning contexts considera-
tion needs to be given to ways of building ﬂexibility and differentiation into task design
and implementation.
In spite of the problems associated with establishing task difﬁculty, the effective use
of classroom learning experiences requires a principled and coherent approach to task
selection and sequencing. This means taking into account the speciﬁc competences of
the learner and factors that affect task difﬁculty, and manipulating task parameters in
order to modify the task according to the needs and capabilities of the learner.
In considering levels of task difﬁculty, therefore, it is necessary to take into account:
•
user/learner’s competences and characteristics, including the learner’s own pur-
poses and learning style;
•
task conditions and constraints which may affect the language user/learner’s perfor-
mance in carrying out speciﬁc tasks, and which, in learning contexts, may be
adjusted to accommodate learner competences and characteristics.
7.3.1
Learner competences and learner characteristics
The learner’s different competences are closely related to individual characteristics of a
cognitive, affective and linguistic nature which need to be taken into account in estab-
lishing the potential difﬁculty of a given task for a particular learner.
7.3.1.1
Cognitive factors
Task familiarity: cognitive load may be lessened and successful task completion facilitated
according to the extent of the learner’s familiarity with:
•
the type of task and operations involved;
•
the theme(s);
•
type of text (genre);
•
interactional schemata (scripts and frames) involved as the availability to the learner
of unconscious or ‘routinised’ schemata can free the learner to deal with other
aspects of performance, or assists in anticipating text content and organisation;
•
necessary background knowledge (assumed by the speaker or writer);
•
relevant sociocultural knowledge, e.g. knowledge of social norms and variations,
social conventions and rules, language forms appropriate to the context, references
connected with national or cultural identity, and distinctive differences between the
learner’s culture and the target culture (see section 5.1.1.2) and intercultural aware-
ness (see 5.1.1.3).
Skills: task completion depends on the learner’s ability to exercise, inter alia:
•
the organisational and interpersonal skills necessary to carry out the different steps
of the task;
160

Tasks and their role in language teaching
•
the learning skills and strategies that facilitate task completion, including coping
when linguistic resources are inadequate, discovering for oneself, planning and mon-
itoring task implementation;
•
intercultural skills (see section 5.1.2.2), including the ability to cope with what is
implicit in the discourse of native speakers.
Ability to cope with processing demands: a task is likely to make greater or lesser demands
depending on the learner’s capacity to:
•
handle the number of steps or ‘cognitive operations’ involved, and their concrete or
abstract nature;
•
attend to the processing demands of the task (amount of ‘on-line thinking’) and to
relating different steps of the task to one another (or to combining different but
related tasks).
7.3.1.2
Affective factors
Self-esteem: a positive self-image and lack of inhibition is likely to contribute to successful
task completion where the learner has the necessary self-conﬁdence to persist in carry-
ing out the task; for example, assuming control of interaction when necessary (e.g. inter-
vening to obtain clariﬁcation, to check understanding, willingness to take risks, or, when
faced with comprehension difﬁculties, continuing to read or listen and making infer-
ences etc.); the degree of inhibition may be inﬂuenced by the particular situation or task.
Involvement and motivation: successful task performance is more likely where the
learner is fully involved; a high level of intrinsic motivation to carry out the task – due
to interest in the task or because of its perceived relevance, for example to real life needs
or to the completion of another linked task (task interdependence) – will promote greater
learner involvement; extrinsic motivation may also play a role, for example where there
are external pressures to complete the task successfully (e.g. to earn praise or in order
not to lose face, or for competitive reasons).
State: performance is inﬂuenced by the learner’s physical and emotional state (an
alert and relaxed learner is more likely to learn and to succeed than a tired and anxious
one).
Attitude: the difﬁculty of a task which introduces new sociocultural knowledge and
experiences will be affected by, for example: the learner’s interest in and openness to oth-
erness; willingness to relativise his or her own cultural viewpoint and value system; will-
ingness to assume the role of ‘cultural intermediary’ between his or her own and the
foreign culture and to resolve intercultural misunderstanding and conﬂict.
7.3.1.3
Linguistic factors
The stage of development of the learner’s linguistic resources is a primary factor to be
considered in establishing the suitability of a particular task or in manipulating task
parameters: level of knowledge and control of grammar, vocabulary and phonology or
orthography required to carry out the task, i.e. language resources such as range, gram-
matical and lexical accuracy, and aspects of language use such as ﬂuency, ﬂexibility,
coherence, appropriacy, precision.
161

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
A task may be linguistically demanding but cognitively simple, or vice versa, and
consequently one factor may be offset against the other in task selection for pedagogic
purposes (although an appropriate response to a cognitively demanding task may be
linguistically challenging in a real life context). In carrying out a task learners have to
handle both content and form. Where they do not need to devote undue attention to
formal aspects, then more resources are available to attend to cognitive aspects, and
vice versa. The availability of routinised schematic knowledge frees the learner to deal
with content and, in the case of interaction and spontaneous production activities, to
concentrate on more accurate use of less well established forms. The learner’s ability
to compensate for ‘gaps’ in his or her linguistic competence is an important factor in
successful task completion for all activities (see communication strategies, section
4.4).
7.3.2
Task conditions and constraints
A range of factors may be manipulated with regard to conditions and constraints in class-
room tasks involving:
•
interaction and production;
•
reception.
7.3.2.1
Interaction and production
Conditions and constraints affecting the difﬁculty of interaction and production
tasks:
•
Support
•
Time
•
Goal
•
Predictability
•
Physical conditions
•
Participants
•
Support:
The provision of adequate information concerning contextual features and the availabil-
ity of language assistance can help reduce task difﬁculty.
•
amount of contextualisation provided: task accomplishment may be facilitated by the
provision of sufﬁcient and relevant information about participants, roles, content,
goals, setting (including visuals) and relevant, clear and adequate instructions or
guidelines for carrying out the task;
•
extent to which language assistance is provided: in interaction activities, task rehear-
sal or carrying out a parallel task in a preparatory phase, and the provision of lan-
guage support (key words, etc.) helps to create expectations and to activate prior
knowledge or experience and acquired schemata; non-immediate production activ-
162

Tasks and their role in language teaching
ities will obviously be facilitated by the availability of resources such as reference
works, relevant models, and assistance from others.
•
Time:
The less time available for task preparation and performance, the more demanding the
task is likely to be. Temporal aspects to be considered include:
•
time available for preparation, i.e. the extent to which planning or rehearsal is pos-
sible: in spontaneous communication intentional planning is not possible and con-
sequently a highly developed and subconscious use of strategies is required for
successful task completion; in other instances the learner may be under less severe
time pressure and can exercise relevant strategies at a more conscious level, for
example where communication schemata are fairly predictable or determined in
advance as in routine transactions, or where there is adequate time for planning, exe-
cuting, evaluating, and editing text as is normally the case with interaction tasks
which do not require an immediate response (corresponding by letter) or non-
immediate spoken or written production tasks;
•
time available for execution: the greater the degree of urgency inherent in the com-
municative event, or the shorter the time allowed for learners to complete the task,
the greater the pressure in carrying out the task in spontaneous communication;
however, non-spontaneous interaction or production tasks may also create time pres-
sure, for example, to meet a deadline for completing a text, which in turn reduces
the time available for planning, execution, evaluation and repair;
•
duration of turns: longer turns in spontaneous interaction (e.g. recounting an anec-
dote) are normally more demanding than short turns;
•
duration of the task: where cognitive factors and performance conditions are constant,
a lengthy spontaneous interaction, a (complex) task with many steps, or the planning
and execution of a lengthy spoken or written text is likely to be more demanding
than a corresponding task of a shorter duration.
•
Goal:
The greater the amount of negotiation required to achieve the task goal(s) the more
demanding the task is likely to be. In addition, the extent to which expectations with
regard to task outcomes are shared by the teacher and learners will facilitate the accep-
tance of diversiﬁed but acceptable task accomplishment.
•
convergence or divergence of task goal(s): in an interaction task a convergent goal nor-
mally involves more ‘communicative stress’ than a divergent goal, i.e. the former
requires participants to arrive at a single, agreed outcome (such as reaching a con-
sensus on a course of action to be followed) which may involve considerable negotia-
tion as speciﬁc information which is essential for successful task completion is
exchanged, whereas the latter has no single, speciﬁc intended outcome (e.g. a simple
exchange of views);
•
learner and teacher attitudes to goal(s): teacher and learner awareness of the possibility
and acceptability of different outcomes (as opposed to learners’ (perhaps subcon-
scious) striving for a single ‘correct’ outcome) may inﬂuence task execution.
163

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
•
Predictability:
Regular changes in task parameters during task execution are likely to increase demands
on interlocutors.
•
in an interaction task, the introduction of an unexpected element (event, circum-
stances, information, participant) obliges the learner to activate relevant strategies
to cope with the dynamics of the new and more complex situation; in a production
task the development of a ‘dynamic’ text (e.g. a story involving regular changes of
characters, scenes and with time shifts) is likely to be more demanding than produc-
ing a ‘static’ text (e.g. describing a lost or stolen object).
•
Physical conditions:
Noise can add to the processing demands in interaction:
•
interference: background noise or a poor telephone line, for example, may require par-
ticipants to draw on prior experience, schematic knowledge, inferencing skills, etc.
to compensate for ‘gaps’ in the message.
•
Participants:
In addition to the above parameters, a variety of participant-related factors, although
they cannot normally be manipulated, need to be taken into account when considering
conditions inﬂuencing the ease of difﬁculty of real life tasks involving interaction.
•
co-operativeness of interlocutor(s): a sympathetic interlocutor will facilitate successful
communication by ceding a degree of control over the interaction to the user/learner,
e.g. in negotiating and accepting modiﬁcation of goals, and in facilitating compre-
hension, for example by responding positively to requests to speak more slowly, to
repeat, to clarify;
•
features of speech of interlocutors, e.g. rate, accent, clarity, coherence;
•
visibility of interlocutors (accessibility of paralinguistic features in face to face commu-
nication facilitates communication);
•
general and communicative competences of interlocutors, including behaviour (degree of
familiarity with norms in a particular speech community), and knowledge of the
subject matter.
7.3.2.2
Reception
Conditions and constraints affecting the difﬁculty of comprehension tasks:
•
Task support
•
Text characteristics
•
Type of response required
•
Task support
The introduction of various forms of support can reduce the possible difﬁculty of texts,
for example, a preparatory phase can provide orientation and activate prior knowledge,
164

Tasks and their role in language teaching
clear task instructions help to avoid possible confusion, and work arrangements involv-
ing small group settings offer possibilities for learner co-operation and mutual assis-
tance.
•
preparatory phase: creating expectations, providing necessary background knowl-
edge, activating schematic knowledge, and ﬁltering speciﬁc linguistic difﬁculties
during a pre-listening/viewing or pre-reading phase reduce the processing load and
consequently task demands; contextual assistance may be provided also by studying
questions accompanying a text (and therefore ideally placed before a written text),
and from clues such as visuals, layout, headings, etc.;
•
task instructions: uncomplicated, relevant and sufﬁcient task instructions (neither too
much nor too little information) lessen the possibility of confusion about task pro-
cedures and goals;
•
small group setting: for certain learners, and particularly but not exclusively for slower
learners, a small group work arrangement involving co-operative listening/reading is
more likely to result in successful task completion than individual work, as learners
can share the processing load and obtain assistance and feedback on their under-
standing from one another.
•
Text characteristics
In evaluating a text for use with a particular learner or group of learners, factors such as
linguistic complexity, text type, discourse structure, physical presentation, length of the
text and its relevance for the learner(s), need to be considered.
•
linguistic complexity: particularly complex syntax consumes attentional resources that
might otherwise be available for dealing with content; for example, long sentences
with a number of subordinate clauses, non-continuous constituents, multiple nega-
tion, scope ambiguity, use of anaphorics and deictics without clear antecedents or
reference. Syntactic over-simpliﬁcation of authentic texts, however, may actually
have the effect of increasing the level of difﬁculty (because of the elimination of
redundancies, clues to meaning etc.);
•
text type: familiarity with the genre and domain (and with assumed background and
sociocultural knowledge) helps the learner in anticipating and comprehending text
structure and content; the concrete or abstract nature of the text is also likely to play
a role; for example, concrete description, instructions or narratives (particularly with
adequate visual supports), for example, are likely to be less demanding than abstract
argumentation or explanation;
•
discourse structure: textual coherence and clear organisation (for example, temporal
sequencing, main points clearly signalled and presented before illustration of the
points), the explicit rather than implicit nature of information presented, the
absence of conﬂicting or surprising information, all contribute to reducing informa-
tion processing complexity;
•
physical presentation: written and spoken texts obviously make differing demands
because of the need to process information in spoken text in real time. In addition,
noise, distortion and interference (e.g. weak radio/television reception, or
untidy/smudged handwriting) increase the difﬁculty of comprehension; in the case
165

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
of spoken (audio) text the greater the number of speakers and the less distinct their
voices, the more difﬁcult it is to identify and understand individual speakers; other
factors which increase difﬁculty in listening/viewing include overlapping speech,
phonetic reduction, unfamiliar accents, speed of delivery, monotony, low volume,
etc.;
•
length of text: in general a short text is less demanding than a long text on a similar
topic as a longer text requires more processing and there is an additional memory
load, risk of fatigue and distraction (especially in the case of younger learners).
However, a long text which is not too dense and contains considerable redundancy
may be easier than a short dense text presenting the same information;
•
relevance to the learner: a high level of motivation to understand due to personal inter-
est in the content will help to sustain the learner’s efforts to understand (although
it will not necessarily assist comprehension directly); while the occurrence of low fre-
quency vocabulary may be expected to increase the difﬁculty of a text in general, a
text containing quite speciﬁc vocabulary on a familiar and relevant topic is likely to
be less demanding for a specialist in the ﬁeld than a text containing wide-ranging
vocabulary of a more general nature, and it may be approached with greater conﬁ-
dence.
Encouraging learners to express their personal knowledge, ideas and opinions within a
comprehension task may increase motivation and conﬁdence, and activate linguistic
competence related to the text. Embedding a comprehension task within another task
may also help to make it inherently purposeful and increase learner involvement.
•
Type of response required
While a text may be relatively difﬁcult the type of response required by the task which
is set may be manipulated in order to accommodate the learner’s competences and char-
acteristics. Task design may also depend on whether the aim is to develop comprehen-
sion skills or to check understanding. Accordingly, the type of response demanded may
vary considerably, as numerous typologies of comprehension tasks illustrate.
A comprehension task may require global or selective comprehension, or under-
standing of important points of detail. Certain tasks may require the reader/listener
to show understanding of the main information clearly stated in a text, while others
may require the use of inferencing skills. A task may be summative (to be completed
on the basis of the complete text), or may be structured so as to relate to manageable
units (e.g. accompanying each section of a text) and thus making less demands on
memory.
The response may be non-verbal (no overt response or a simple action such as ticking
a picture) or a verbal response (spoken or written) may be required. The latter may, for
instance, involve identifying and reproducing information from a text for a particular
purpose or may, for example, require the learner to complete the text or to produce a new
text through related interaction or production tasks.
The time allowed for the response may be varied so as to decrease or increase task dif-
ﬁculty. The more time a listener or reader has to replay or reread a text, the more he or
she is likely to understand and the greater the opportunity to apply a range of strategies
for coping with difﬁculties in understanding the text.
166

Tasks and their role in language teaching
Users of the Framework may wish to consider and where appropriate state:
•
principles for the selection and weighting of ‘real life’ and ‘pedagogic’ tasks for their
purposes, including the appropriateness of different types of tasks in particular learning
contexts;
•
the criteria for selecting tasks which are purposeful and meaningful for the learner, and
provide a challenging but realistic and attainable goal, involving the learner as fully as
possible, and allowing for differing learner interpretations and outcomes;
•
the relationship between tasks that are primarily meaning-oriented and learning
experiences speciﬁcally focused on form so that the learner’s attention might be focused in
a regular and useful manner on both aspects in a balanced approach to the development
of accuracy and ﬂuency;
•
ways of taking into account the pivotal role of the learner’s strategies in relating
competences and performance in the successful accomplishment of challenging tasks under
varying conditions and constraints (see section 4.4); ways of facilitating successful task
accomplishment and learning (including activation of the learner’s prior competences in a
preparatory phase);
•
criteria and options for selecting tasks, and where appropriate manipulating task
parameters in order to modify the level of task difﬁculty so as to accommodate learners’
differing and developing competences, and diversity in learner characteristics (ability,
motivation, needs, interests);
•
how the perceived level of difﬁculty of a task might be taken into account in the evaluation
of successful task completion and in (self) assessment of the learner’s communicative
competence (Chapter 9).
167

8
Linguistic diversiﬁcation and the curriculum
8.1
Deﬁnition and initial approach
Plurilingual and pluricultural competence refers to the ability to use languages for the pur-
poses of communication and to take part in intercultural interaction, where a person,
viewed as a social agent has proﬁciency, of varying degrees, in several languages and
experience of several cultures. This is not seen as the superposition or juxtaposition of
distinct competences, but rather as the existence of a complex or even composite compe-
tence on which the user may draw.
The customary approach is to present learning a foreign language as an addition, in a
compartmentalised way, of a competence to communicate in a foreign language to the
competence to communicate in the mother tongue. The concept of plurilingual and plu-
ricultural competence tends to:
•
move away from the supposed balanced dichotomy established by the customary
L1/L2 pairing by stressing plurilingualism where bilingualism is just one particular
case;
•
consider that a given individual does not have a collection of distinct and separate
competences to communicate depending on the languages he/she knows, but rather
a plurilingual and pluricultural competence encompassing the full range of the lan-
guages available to him/her;
•
stress the pluricultural dimensions of this multiple competence but without neces-
sarily suggesting links between the development of abilities concerned with relating
to other cultures and the development of linguistic communicative proﬁciency.
A general observation can nevertheless be made, linking different distinct language
learning components and paths. It is generally the case that language teaching in
schools has to a large extent tended to stress objectives concerned with either the indi-
vidual’s general competence (especially at primary school level) or communicative language
competence (particularly for those aged between 11 and 16), while courses for adults (stu-
dents or people already working) formulate objectives in terms of speciﬁc language activ-
ities or functional ability in a particular domain. This emphasis, in the case of the former
on the construction and development of competences, and in the latter case on optimal
preparation for activities concerned with functioning in a speciﬁc context, corre-
sponds no doubt to the distinct roles of general initial education on the one hand, and
specialised and continuing education on the other. In this context, rather than treat-
ing these as opposites, the common framework of reference can help to relate these dif-
168

Linguistic diversiﬁcation and the curriculum
ferent practices with respect to one another and show that they should in fact be com-
plementary.
8.2
Options for curricular design
8.2.1
Diversiﬁcation within an overall concept
Discussion about curricula in relation to the Framework may be guided by three main
principles.
The ﬁrst is that discussion on curricula should be in line with the overall objective of
promoting plurilingualism and linguistic diversity. This means that the teaching and
learning of any one language should also be examined in conjunction with the provision
for other languages in the education system and the paths which learners might choose
to follow in the long term in their efforts to develop a variety of language skills.
The second principle is that this diversiﬁcation is only possible, particularly in schools,
if the cost efﬁciency of the system is considered, so as to avoid unnecessary repetition
and to promote the economies of scale and the transfer of skills which linguistic diver-
sity facilitates. If, for example, the education system allows pupils to begin learning two
foreign languages at a pre-determined stage in their studies, and provides for optional
learning of a third language, the objectives or kinds of progression in each of the chosen
languages need not necessarily be the same (e.g. the starting point need not always be
preparation for functional interaction satisfying the same communicative needs nor
would one necessarily continue to emphasise learning strategies).
The third principle is, therefore, that considerations and measures relating to curricula
should not just be limited to a curriculum for each language taken in isolation, nor even
an integrated curriculum for several languages. They should also be approached in terms
of their role in a general language education, in which linguistic knowledge (savoir) and
skills (savoir-faire), along with the ability to learn (savoir-apprendre), play not only a speciﬁc
role in a given language but also a transversal or transferable role across languages.
8.2.2
From the partial to the transversal
Between ‘related’ languages in particular – though not just between these – knowledge
and skills may be transferred by a kind of osmosis. And, with reference to curricula, it
should be stressed that:
•
all knowledge of a language is partial, however much of a ‘mother tongue’ or ‘native
language’ it seems to be. It is always incomplete, never as developed or perfect in an
ordinary individual as it would be for the utopian, ‘ideal native speaker’. In addition,
a given individual never has equal mastery of the different component parts of the
language in question (for example of oral and written skills, or of comprehension and
interpretation compared to production skills);
•
any partial knowledge is also more than it might seem. For instance, in order to
achieve the ‘limited’ goal of increasing understanding of specialised texts in a given
foreign language on very familiar subjects it is necessary to acquire knowledge and
169

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
skills which can also be used for many other purposes. Such ‘spin-off’ value is
however a matter for the learner rather than the responsibility of the curriculum
planner;
•
those who have learnt one language also know a great deal about many other lan-
guages without necessarily realising that they do. The learning of further languages
generally facilitates the activation of this knowledge and increases awareness of it,
which is a factor to be taken into account rather than proceeding as if it did not exist.
Although leaving a very broad freedom of choice in drawing up curricula and progres-
sion, these different principles and observations also aim to encourage efforts to adopt
a transparent and coherent approach when identifying options and making decisions. It
is in this process that a framework of reference will be of particular value.
8.3
Towards curriculum scenarios
8.3.1
Curriculum and variation of objectives
From the above, it can be seen that each of the major components and sub-components
of the proposed model may, if selected as a main learning objective, result in various
choices in relation to content approaches and means to facilitate successful learning. For
example, whether it is a matter of ‘skills’ (general competences of the individual
learner/language user) or the ‘sociolinguistic component’ (within communicative lan-
guage competence) or strategies, or comprehension (under the heading of language
activities), in each case it is a question of components (and for quite distinct elements of
the taxonomy proposed in the Framework) upon which a curriculum might or might not
place emphasis and which might be considered in different instances as an objective, a
means or a prerequisite. And for each of these components the question of the internal
structure adopted (for example, which sub-components to select in the sociolinguistic
component? how to sub-categorise strategies?) and the criteria for any system of progres-
sion over time (e.g. linear ranking of different types of comprehension activities?) could
at least be identiﬁed and considered, if not treated in detail. This is the direction in which
the other sections of this document invite the reader to approach the questions and con-
sider the options appropriate to his or her own particular situation.
This ‘exploded’ view is all the more appropriate in the light of the generally accepted
notion that the selection and ordering of objectives on which to base language learning
may vary enormously depending on the context, the target group and the level in ques-
tion. Furthermore, it should be stressed that objectives for the same type of public in the
same context and at the same level could also vary regardless of the weight of tradition
and the constraints imposed by the education system.
The discussion surrounding modern language teaching in primary schools illustrates
this in that there is a great deal of variety and controversy – at national or even regional
level within a country – concerning the deﬁnition of the initial, inevitably ‘partial’ aims
to be set for this type of teaching. Should pupils: learn some basic rudiments of the
foreign language system (linguistic component)?; develop linguistic awareness (more
general linguistic knowledge (savoir), skills (savoir-faire) and savoir-être?; become more
objective with regard to their native language and culture or be made to feel more at
170

Linguistic diversiﬁcation and the curriculum
home in it?; be given conﬁdence from the realisation and conﬁrmation that they are
capable of learning another language?; learn how to learn?; acquire a minimum of oral
comprehension skills?; play with a foreign language and become familiar with it (in par-
ticular some of its phonetic and rhythmic characteristics) through counting-rhymes and
songs? It goes without saying that it is possible to keep several irons in the ﬁre and that
many objectives could be combined or accommodated with others. However, it should be
emphasised that in drawing up a curriculum the selection and balancing of objectives,
content, ordering and means of assessment are closely linked to the analysis which has
been made for each of the speciﬁed components.
These considerations imply that:
•
throughout the language learning period – and this is equally applicable to schools
– there may be continuity with regard to objectives or they may be modiﬁed and their
order of priority adjusted;
•
in a language curriculum accommodating several languages, the objectives and syl-
labuses of the different languages may either be similar or different;
•
quite radically different approaches are possible and each can have its own trans-
parency and coherence with regard to options chosen, and each can be explained
with reference to the Framework;
•
reﬂection on the curriculum may therefore involve the consideration of possible sce-
narios for the development of plurilingual and pluricultural competences and the
role of the school in this process.
8.3.2
Some examples of differentiated curriculum scenarios
In the following brief illustration of what might be envisaged by scenario options or varia-
tions, two types of organisation and curriculum decisions for a particular school system are
outlined, to include, as suggested above, two modern languages other than the language of
instruction (conventionally, but mistakenly, referred to below as the native language, since
everybody knows that the teaching language, even in Europe, is often not the native lan-
guage of the pupils): one language starting in primary school (foreign language 1, hereafter
FL1) and the other in lower secondary school (foreign language 2, hereafter FL2), with a
third (FL3) being introduced as an optional subject at upper secondary level.
In these examples of scenarios a distinction is made between primary, lower secondary
and upper secondary which does not correspond to all national education systems.
However, these illustrative programmes can easily be transposed and adapted, even in
contexts where the range of languages on offer is narrower or where the ﬁrst institu-
tional learning of a foreign language comes later than primary level. He who can do more
can do less. The alternatives offered here include forms of learning for three foreign lan-
guages (two out of several on offer forming part of the compulsory programme and the
third, which can also be chosen, being offered as an optional extra or in lieu of other
optional subjects) because this seems to be the most realistic in the majority of cases and
represents a useful basis to illustrate this point. The central argument is that for a given
context various scenarios can be conceived and there can be local diversiﬁcation, pro-
vided that in each case due attention is paid to the overall coherence and structure of
any particular option.
171

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
a)
First scenario:
Primary school:
The ﬁrst foreign language (FL1) begins in primary school with the main aim of devel-
oping ‘language awareness’, a general consciousness of linguistic phenomena (rela-
tionship with the native language or other languages present in the classroom
environment). The focus here is on partial objectives concerned above all with an indi-
vidual’s general competences – (discovery or recognition by the school of the plural-
ity of languages and cultures, preparation for moving away from ethnocentrism,
relativisation but also conﬁrmation of the learner’s own linguistic and cultural iden-
tity; attention paid to body language and gestures, sound aspects, music and rhythm,
experience of the physical and aesthetic dimensions of certain elements of another
language) – and their relationship with communicative competence, but without
there being a structured and explicit attempt to develop this speciﬁc competence.
Lower secondary school:
•
FL1 continues with the emphasis from now on placed on a gradual development
of communicative competence (in its linguistic, sociolinguistic and pragmatic
dimensions) but taking full account of achievements at primary level in the area
of language awareness.
•
The second foreign language (FL2, not taught at primary school) would not start
from scratch either; it too would take account of what had been covered at
primary school on the basis of and in relation to FL1, whilst at the same time pur-
suing slightly different objectives from those now pursued in FL1 (for instance,
by giving priority to comprehension activities over production activities).
Upper secondary level:
Continuing the example in this scenario, consideration should now be given to:
•
reducing the formal teaching of FL1 and using the language instead on a regular
or occasional basis for teaching another subject (a form of domain-related learn-
ing and ‘bilingual education’);
•
maintaining the emphasis with regard to FL2 on comprehension, concentrating
in particular on different text types and the organisation of discourse, and relat-
ing this work to what is being done or has already been done in the mother
tongue, whilst also using skills learnt in FL1;
•
inviting pupils who choose to study the optional third foreign language (FL3) ini-
tially to take part in discussions and activities relating to types of learning and
learning strategies that they have already experienced; they are then encouraged
to work more autonomously, using a resource centre and contributing to the
drawing up of a group or individual work programme designed to achieve the
objectives set by the group or the institution.
b)
Second scenario:
Primary school:
The ﬁrst foreign language (FL1) starts at primary school with the emphasis on basic
oral communication and a clearly predetermined linguistic content (with the aim of
172

Linguistic diversiﬁcation and the curriculum
establishing the beginnings of a basic linguistic component, primarily phonetic and
syntactic aspects, while promoting elementary oral interaction in class).
Lower secondary school:
For FL1, FL2 (when this second foreign language is introduced) and the native lan-
guage, time is spent going over the learning methods and techniques encountered
in primary school for FL1 and, separately, for the native language: the aim at this
stage would be to promote sensitivity to and increase awareness of the learner’s
approach to languages and learning activities.
•
For FL1 a ‘regular’ programme designed to develop the different skills continues
until the end of secondary school but, at various intervals, this is supplemented
with revision and discussion sessions relating to the resources and methods used
for teaching and learning so as to accommodate an increasing differentiation
between the proﬁles of different pupils and their expectations and interests.
•
For FL2 at this stage particular emphasis could be placed on the sociocultural and
sociolinguistic elements as perceived through increasing familiarity with the
media (popular press, radio and television) and possibly linked with the native
language course and beneﬁting from what has been covered in FL1. In this cur-
riculum model, FL2, which continues until the end of secondary school, is the
main forum for cultural and intercultural discussion fuelled through contact
with the other languages in the curriculum and taking media-related texts as its
main focus. It could also incorporate the experience of an international
exchange with the focus on intercultural relations. Consideration should also be
given to using other subjects (e.g. history or geography) to help initiate a well
thought-out approach to pluriculturalism.
Upper secondary level:
•
FL1 and FL2 each continue in the same direction but at a more complex and
demanding level. Learners who opt for a third foreign language (FL3) do so pri-
marily for ‘vocational’ purposes and relate their language learning to a more
professionally-oriented or other academic branch of their studies (for example
orientation towards the language of commerce, economics or technology).
It should be stressed that in this second scenario, as in the ﬁrst, the ﬁnal plurilin-
gual and pluricultural proﬁle of the learners may be ‘uneven’ to the extent that:
•
the level of proﬁciency in the languages making up plurilingual competence
varies;
•
the cultural aspects are unequally developed for the different languages;
•
it is not necessarily the case that for the languages in which linguistic aspects
received most attention the cultural aspect is also the most developed;
•
‘partial’ competences, as described above, are integrated.
To these brief indications it may be added that in all cases time should be allowed at some
point or other, in the case of all languages, for considering the approaches and learning
paths to which learners, in their respective development, are exposed or for which they
opt. This implies building into curriculum design at school scope for explicitness, the
173

Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: learning, teaching, assessment
progressive development of ‘learning awareness’ and the introduction of general lan-
guage education which helps learners establish metacognitive control over their own
competences and strategies. Learners situate these in relation to other possible compe-
tences and strategies and with regard to the language activities in which they are applied
in order to accomplish tasks within speciﬁc domains.
In other words, one of the aims of curriculum design, whatever the particular curric-
ulum, is to make learners aware of categories and their dynamic interrelationship as pro-
posed in the model adopted for the reference framework.
8.4
Assessment and school, out-of-school and post-school learning
If the curriculum is deﬁned, as suggested by its primary meaning, in terms of the path
travelled by a learner through a sequence of educational experiences, whether under the
control of an institution or not, then a curriculum does not end with leaving school, but
continues in some way or other thereafter in a process of life-long learning.
In this perspective, therefore, the curriculum of the school as institution has the aim
of developing in the learner a plurilingual and pluricultural competence which at the
end of school studies may take the form of differentiated proﬁles depending on individ-
uals and the paths they have followed. It is clear that the form of this competence is not
immutable and the subsequent personal and professional experiences of each social
agent, the direction of his or her life, will cause it to evolve and change its balance
through further development, reduction and reshaping. It is here that adult education
and continuing training, among other things, play a role. Three complementary aspects
may be considered in relation to this.
8.4.1
The place of the school curriculum
To accept the notion that the educational curriculum is not limited to school and does
not end with it is also to accept that plurilingual and plu